OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System V100R006C01 Product Description
Issue 01
Date 2012-10-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description About This Document
About This Document
Product Version The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation.
Product Name Product Version
OptiX OSN 550 V100R006C01
iManager U2000 V100R008C00
Intended Audience This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in terms of network application, functions, hardware structure, software architecture, features, and technical specifications.
This document is intended for:
Network planning engineers Data configuration engineers System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Alerts you to a high risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in serious injury or death.
Alerts you to a medium or low risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in moderate or minor injury.
Alerts you to a potentially hazardous situation that could, if not avoided, result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description About This Document
Symbol Description
Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points in the main text.
GUI Conventions Convention Meaning
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01 This document is the first issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 1 of product version V100R006C00, this issue incorporates the following updates:
Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1. Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1. Updated the service access capability of the equipment according to the new boards. Optimized the structure and related description of the "Product Positioning and Features",
"Quicklook", "Networking and Application Scenarios" sections.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C00 This issue is used for first office application (FOA) of V100R006C00.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents
Contents
About This Document .................................................................................................................... ii
1 Product Positioning and Features .............................................................................................. 1
1.1 Product Positioning .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Product Features ............................................................................................................................................... 2
2 Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................ 5
3 System Architecture and Service Access ................................................................................ 16
3.1 System Architecture ....................................................................................................................................... 16
3.2 Service Types ................................................................................................................................................. 18
3.2.1 Types of Supported Services ................................................................................................................. 18
3.2.2 Access Capacities .................................................................................................................................. 20
4 Product Features .......................................................................................................................... 22
4.1 Services Supported ......................................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.1 Service Overview (Packet) .................................................................................................................... 22
4.1.2 Service Overview (TDM) ..................................................................................................................... 29
4.2 Redundancy and Protection ............................................................................................................................ 35
4.2.1 Equipment Level Protection .................................................................................................................. 35
4.2.2 Network Level Protection (Packet) ....................................................................................................... 36
4.2.3 Network Level Protection (TDM) ......................................................................................................... 48
4.3 Synchronization .............................................................................................................................................. 55
4.3.1 Requirements for Clock Synchronization ............................................................................................. 55
4.3.2 Clock and Time Synchronization (Packet) ............................................................................................ 56
4.3.3 Clock Synchronization (TDM) ............................................................................................................. 64
5 Hardware and Structure ............................................................................................................. 66
5.1 Chassis ........................................................................................................................................................... 66
5.1.1 Chassis Structure ................................................................................................................................... 66
5.1.2 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (Packet) ............................................................................... 69
5.1.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (TDM) ................................................................................. 71
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet ............................................................................................................................................. 72
5.3 Board Category .............................................................................................................................................. 72
6 Networking and Application Scenarios ................................................................................. 79
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents
6.1 Basic Network Topologies ............................................................................................................................. 79
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking .................................................................................................... 80
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking ............................................................................................ 85
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking ...................................................................................................... 91
7 Network Management System ................................................................................................. 95
7.1 Network Management .................................................................................................................................... 95
7.2 DCN Management ......................................................................................................................................... 97
7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs ................................................................................................. 98
8 Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................................... 101
8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet) ..................................................................................................................... 104
8.1.1 TP-Assist ............................................................................................................................................. 104
8.1.2 MPLS OAM ........................................................................................................................................ 106
8.1.3 MPLS-TP OAM .................................................................................................................................. 107
8.1.4 ETH-OAM .......................................................................................................................................... 107
8.1.5 ATM OAM .......................................................................................................................................... 109
8.1.6 RMON ................................................................................................................................................ 109
8.1.7 PRBS ................................................................................................................................................... 110
8.1.8 CES Alarm Transmission .................................................................................................................... 110
8.1.9 Port Mirroring ..................................................................................................................................... 112
8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM) ....................................................................................................................... 113
8.2.1 PRBS ................................................................................................................................................... 113
8.2.2 ETH-OAM .......................................................................................................................................... 113
8.2.3 RMON ................................................................................................................................................ 113
8.2.4 Data Test Frame .................................................................................................................................. 114
8.3 Upgrade Methods ......................................................................................................................................... 114
9 Security Management ............................................................................................................... 116
9.1 Authentication Management ........................................................................................................................ 116
9.2 Authorization Management .......................................................................................................................... 117
9.3 Network Security Management .................................................................................................................... 117
9.4 System Security Management ...................................................................................................................... 118
9.5 Log Management ......................................................................................................................................... 119
10 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................ 121
10.1 General Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 122
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators ................................................................................................................... 123
10.3 TDM Performance Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 130
10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ........................................................................................ 132
10.5 Optical Port Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 133
10.6 Colored Optical Ports ................................................................................................................................. 142
10.7 Electrical Port Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 145
10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications...................................................................................................................... 149
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description Contents
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation ...................................................................................................................... 151
10.10 Safety Certification .................................................................................................................................. 157
10.11 Environmental Specifications ................................................................................................................... 157
10.11.1 Storage Environment ....................................................................................................................... 158
10.11.2 Transportation Environment ............................................................................................................ 160
10.11.3 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed in a Cabinet) ........................................ 162
10.11.4 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed on a Wall) ............................................ 166
11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection .................................................................. 171
12 Standard Compliance ............................................................................................................. 172
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... 172
12.2 IETF Standards ........................................................................................................................................... 176
12.3 IEEE Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 178
12.4 Environment Related Standards ................................................................................................................. 179
12.5 MEF Standards ........................................................................................................................................... 181
12.6 Safety Standards ......................................................................................................................................... 181
12.7 EMC Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 182
12.8 Protection Standards ................................................................................................................................... 183
A Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... 184
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Features
1 Product Positioning and Features
About This Chapter With the increasing number of packet services, conventional time division multiplexing (TDM) devices cannot meet packet service transmission demands. The OptiX OSN 550 supports a variety of service network topologies in the TDM and packet domains, able to meet customers' various service development demands.
1.1 Product Positioning
This section describes product positioning and networking application.
1.2 Product Features
This section describes the equipment features in terms of architecture and technology.
1.1 Product Positioning This section describes product positioning and networking application.
The OptiX OSN 550 is a packet- and TDM-oriented new-generation multi-service CPE optical transmission system, which is positioned at the access layer among Huawei's end-to-end Hybrid multi-service transmission platform (MSTP) product series. This system is characterized by its large capacity, high availability, low power consumption, and compact structure.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiprotocol label switching (MPLS), MPLS-transport profile (MPLS-TP), pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3), Ethernet, ATM, WDM, SDH, and PDH technologies. With these technologies, a pure TDM network, pure PTN network, or Hybrid network can be provisioned.
As the access layer equipment, the OptiX OSN 550 is networked with other OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete solution covering the backbone layer, aggregation layer, and access layer. The complete solution meets 2G/3G/LTE base station backhaul and enterprise leased service access demands. Figure 1-1 illustrates the network application of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Features
Figure 1-1 Network application of the OptiX OSN 550
OptiX OSN 550 BTSNodeB BSCRNC
E1/T1
ATM/IMA E1
OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
E1/STM-1FE
E1/FE/GE
Enterprise leased service
E1/FE/GE
ATM/IMA E1/GEE1/T1
FE
Convergence nodeAccess layerConvergence/Backbo
ne layer
1.2 Product Features This section describes the equipment features in terms of architecture and technology.
Large Capacity, High Availability, Low Power Consumption, and Compact Structure
The OptiX OSN 550 is access layer equipment, which features large capacity, high availability, low power consumption, and compact structure. The OptiX OSN 550 supports:
A maximum of 60 Gbit/s packet switching capacity, a maximum of 20 Gbit/s SDH cross-connect capacity, and a maximum of four 10GE ports
1+1 protection for system control, switching, timing, and power supply units, and network-level protection such as MPLS APS, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), link-state pass through (LPT), subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), and multiplex section protection (MSP)
A maximum power consumption of 240 W, and a typical power consumption of only 149 W
Dimensions (H x W x D) of 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
Universal Switch Architecture and Multi-service Transmission The OptiX OSN 550 has a universal switch architecture, as shown in Figure 1-2. The OptiX OSN 550 supports coexistence of the time division multiplexing (TDM) domain and packet transport network (PTN) domain, which achieves smooth evolution from the TDM domain to the PTN domain while allowing the on-demand configuration and application of pure TDM services and packet services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Features
Figure 1-2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 550
TDM Cross-connectTDM
EoS
STM-N
STM-N
TDM equipment architecture
Packet SwitchPWE3
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet
Packet equipment architecture
TDM/EoS
Ethernet
PWE3
STM-N
Ethernet
“Hybrid MSTP”architecture
+
TDM Cross-connect
Packet Switch
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the access and transmission of PDH, SDH, ATM, Ethernet, MPLS, and MPLS-TP services.
In the PTN domain, the OptiX OSN 550 performs highly efficient statistical multiplexing of data services to reduce the service transport cost per bit. In the TDM domain, the OptiX OSN 550 incorporates SDH functions to ensure the high transport quality of Native TDM services (mainly voice services).
End-to-End Service Configuration, One-Click Commissioning, and One-Click Fault Locating (TP-Assist)
Compared with legacy TDM networks, PTN networks have the following characteristics in terms of O&M:
Lack of overheads indicating the physical states of networks. When a fault occurs on a PTN network, no visual and fast indicator is available to locate the fault.
Networking diversity and complication, which require powerful O&M capabilities
To address those issues, the equipment uses the TP-Assist to provide more O&M means and simplify O&M operations for PTN networks during installation, commissioning, service configuration, fault locating, and routine maintenance. With the TP-Assist, PTN networks have the SDH-like O&M capabilities, which reduce the technical requirements for O&M personnel and improve O&M efficiency.
Hierarchical OAM The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions and have the SDH-like O&M capabilities. It can quickly detect and locate faults at each layer.
The hierarchical OAM functions include ETH-OAM, MPLS tunnel/PW OAM, and MPLS-TP tunnel/PW OAM. Figure 1-3 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 1 Product Positioning and Features
Figure 1-3 Application of hierarchical OAM
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
Ethernet Service OAM Ethernet Port OAMEthernet Port OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM
ETH Layer
PW Layer
Tunnel Layer
MEP
MEP
MEP MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP MIP
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
Strong Environmental Adaptability The OptiX OSN 550 can be mounted in an ETSI or 19-inch cabinet, APM30H outdoor
cabinet, or open rack, or on a wall or desk. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the -48 V/-60 V DC power supply, 110 V/220 V AC power
supply, and uninterruptible power module (UPM) power supply. The UPM offers the storage battery protection function and can feed 3-4 hours' power in the case of a commercial power outage.
The OptiX OSN 550 can operate at a high temperature. Extended operating temperature: -5°C to 65°C
Extreme operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours every day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
2 Quick Reference
This chapter describes the product overview, including product photos, hardware, software, and functions and features.
Table 2-1 lists the overview of the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 2-1 Overview of the OptiX OSN 550
Item Description
Appearance
Chassis dimensions (H x W x D): 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm
Board System control, switching, and timing boards: CXL and PCX Packet processing boards: CQ1, EF8F, EG4C, EM6F, EM6T, EX1, and
MD1 SDH boards: SL1D, SL1Q, and SL4D PDH boards: PL3T and SP3D EoS boards: EFS8 and EGT1 MDM board: DMD2 Auxiliary boards: AUX and FAN Power supply boards: APIU, PIU, and UPM For services and ports supported by the preceding boards, see Table 5-4.
Packet functions and features
See Table 2-2.
TDM functions and features
See Table 2-3.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description
Packet switching capacity
60 Gbit/s
TDM cross-connect capacity
Higher order cross-connect capacity: 20 Gbit/s Lower order cross-connect capacity: 5 Gbit/s
Equipment-level protection
1+1 backup for power supply 1+1 backup between active and standby system control, switching, and
timing boards Fan protection (The failure in a single fan does not affect the operation of
the other fans.)
Intelligent fan speed adjustment
Supports the automatic adjustment of fan speed based on the highest temperature of the board in the chassis.
Management ports and auxiliary ports
Interface Type Description Connector
External clock port
120-ohm external clock port, which can work in 2048 kbit/s mode or 2048 kHz mode
RJ45
External time port
Two external time input/output ports
RJ45
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet
Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet: The equipment provides one port for monitoring and managing an outdoor cabinet.
RJ45
Power supply port
Power supply port connecting to two -48/-60 V DC power supplies
2 mm HM connector
Two 110 V/220 V AC power supply ports
Three-phase socket
Network management port
Ethernet NM port/NM serial port, which is connected to a network management system (NMS)
RJ45
Alarm input/output port
6-input/2-output alarm port
RJ45
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description
64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port
One 64 kbit/s synchronous serial port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous serial port, which transparently transmits one channel of data services
RJ45
Orderwire phone port
Used to provide voice communication for operation/maintenance engineers at different workstations.
RJ45
Table 2-2 OptiX OSN 550 packet functions and features
Item Description
MPLS functions
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement MPLS/MPLS-TP functions. Setup mode: static tunnels Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM): supports MPLS tunnel OAM and
multiprotocol label switching transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM. MPLS tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
PWE3 functions
The packet switching unit of the PCX board works with a service board to implement PWE3 functions. Service categories
− TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services [CESs]) − Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services − ETH PWE3 services
Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs) Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and multi-segment PWs (MS-PWs). PW encapsulation mode: raw mode or tagged mode PW control word: supported by the PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB board whose printed circuit board
(PCB) version is Ver.B and the PCXLX/PCXX board. Protection: 1:1 PW APS OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW OAM. MPLS PW OAM complies with
ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Packet system performance
See Table 10-2.
Service Service Category Maximum Service Port
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description Receiving Capability
Description Connector
Ethernet service: Supports the MPLS technology. Supports the VLAN technology. Supports the QinQ technology. Supports E-Line services based on
PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT+VLAN+VLAN Pri, PORT+QinQ, and PWE3.
Supports Native E-LAN services based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge, IEEE 802.1q bridge, and IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
Supports E-LAN services based on PWE3 (VPLS services).
Supports the following Ethernet data frame formats: IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II.
Supports jumbo frames. Supports the maximum transmission
unit (MTU) of 960 to 9600 bytes (1620 bytes by default).
FE (electrical port): 36
10/100BASE-T(X)
RJ-45
FE (optical port): 48
100BASE-BX
100BASE-FX
100BASE-LX
100BASE-VX
100BASE-ZX
LC
GE (optical port): 22
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-VX
1000BASE-ZX
LC
GE (electrical port): 20
1000BASE-T RJ-45
10GE (optical ports): 4
10GBASE-SR (LAN)
10GBASE-SW (WAN)
10GBASE-LR (LAN)
10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN)
10GBASE-EW (WAN)
10GBASE-ZR (LAN)
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
LC
E1 service: Service types:
− TDM PWE3 (CES E1)
ATM/IMA/E1: 192xE1
Channelized STM-1:
ATM/IMA/E1: 75/120–ohm smart E1
ATM/IMA/E1: Anea 96
Channelized STM-1: LC
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description − ATM PWE3 − Fractional CES E1 − ML_PPP E1
Encapsulation formats: − CESoPSN − SAToP
Compression of idle timeslots: supported only for CESoPSN encapsulation
E1 coding format: HDB3 L/M/R bit processing: supported for
CES services CES ACR: supported
24xSTM-1 port Channelized
STM-1: S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 optical ports and STM-1 SFP electrical port
optical port and SAA straight female
ATM/IMA service: Supports ATM PWE3 services. Supports ATM traffic management. Supports the following ATM
encapsulation modes: − N-to-one VPC − N-to-one VCC − One-to-one VPC − One-to-one VCC
Supports a maximum of 31 concatenated ATM cells.
Supports the following ATM OAM: F4 (VP layer) and F5 (VC layer).
Supports inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA).
192xE1 75/120-ohm smart E1 port
Anea 96
Protection
Tunnel APS Complies with the ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131 standards. Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms (two tunnel APS protection groups,
each carrying 16 PWs) NOTE Tunnel APS and PW APS share 64 protection group resources. MPLS tunnel APS and MPLS-TP tunnel APS share 64 protection group
resources.
PW APS Complies with the ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131 standards. Maximum number of protection groups: 64 Maximum number of members bound into a PW: 512 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms (one protection pair containing eight
members, six PW APS protection groups) NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description Tunnel APS and PW APS share 64 protection group resources. MPLS PW APS and MPLS-TP PW APS share 64 protection group resources.
MSTP Complies with the IEEE 802.1s standard. Maximum number of instances per port: 1 Maximum number of port groups: 1 Maximum number of ports provided by all port groups: 16
ERPS Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Maximum number of protection groups: 8 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms at an optical port and ≤ 2s at an
electrical port if the number of nodes on a ring network is not more than 16 and the link is faulty bidirectionally
NOTE Only Native ETH services support ERPS.
LPT Complies with the Huawei proprietary protocol. Maximum number of services that support LPT: 16 Point-point and point-multipoint LPT Switching duration:
− ≤ 300 ms if the fault is on the NNI side and is detected using PW OAM
− ≤ 300 ms at an optical port and ≤ 3s at an electrical port if the fault is on the UNI side
LAG Complies with the IEEE 802.3ad standard. LAG protection A maximum of 16 LAGs. Each LAG has a maximum of eight
members. Switching duration:
− Manual/Static LAG: ≤ 50 ms at an optical port and ≤ 2s at an electrical port if the link is interrupted bidirectionally
− Static LAG: ≤ 3s if the link is interrupted unidirectionally
ML-PPP Complies with the IETF RFC 1661 and IETF RFC 1990 standards. Total number of PPP links: 504 Number of ML-PPP groups: 64 Number of member links in an ML-PPP group: 16
LMSP Complies with the ITU-T G.841 and ITU-T G.842 standards. Number of protection groups: 8 Protection switching time: ≤ 50 ms
Maintenance
MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM Complies with the ITU-T Y.1711 and ITU-T G.8113.1 standards. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM MPLS OAM: supports CV, FFD, BDI, FDI, Ping, and Traceroute. MPLS-TP OAM: supports CC, RDI, AIS, LB, LT, PW LM, LCK,
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description TST (packet loss test only), PW CSF, and two-way DM.
Maximum sum of the number of tunnels supporting OAM and the number of PWs supporting OAM: 128
NOTE The sum of the number of tunnels supporting OAM and the number of PWs
supporting OAM must not exceed 128. The sum of the number of tunnels supporting MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM and the
number of PWs supporting MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM must not exceed 128.
ETH-OAM Complies with the IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE 802.1ag standards. Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC), loopback
(LB), linktrace (LT), alarm indication signal (AIS), loss measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).
Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault detection, remote loopback, and self-loop detection and looped-port blocking.
Maximum number of MDs/MAs/MEP/MIPs: 64 NOTE ETH-OAM and MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM share 128 OAM resources. Only the E-Line service transmitted in native Ethernet mode supports
ETH-LM and ETH-DM. LM/DM are based on IEEE 802.1ag, implemented by referring to the ITU-T
Y.1731 standard.
ATM OAM Supports the following ATM OAM functions: CC, LB, RDI, and AIS.
RMON Supports port-level and service-level RMON functions, in compliance with RFC 2819. Supports four RMON management groups: Ethernet statistics group, Ethernet history group, Ethernet alarm group, and Ethernet history control group. Port level: Basic Ethernet performance Extended Ethernet performance Service level: L2VPN (private line service) Transit tunnel PW
SNMP Queries port information and port/service performance statistics using a standard SNMP terminal.
Port mirroring Supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service analysis and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services. Supports local port mirroring. Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress
direction of a UNI port.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description
Synchronization
Synchronous Ethernet clock
Synchronous Ethernet clock that complies with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.8262.
Port receiving/transmitting synchronous Ethernet clocks: FE/GE/10GE
Clock source selection algorithm based on the synchronization status message (SSM) protocol
Clock frequency stability (holdover mode): < 50 ppb NOTE
SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks. When working in 10BASE-T mode, FE/GE ports do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
IEEE 1588v2 Supports the OC, BC, TC, and BC+TC clock models. The TC model can work in two modes: E2E TC and P2P TC.
Supports the delay deviation compensation for line transmission in two modes: length deviation compensation and time deviation compensation. The length deviation compensation value ranges from 0 m to 12000 m, and the time deviation compensation value ranges from 0 ns to 65535 ns.
Supports two 1PPS+ToD or DCLS external time ports, which use the RS-422 level. Each port supports compensation for propagation delay on its connected cable. The compensation can be set to a value ranging from 0 μs to 10 μs in steps of 10 ns or less. ToD supports cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs).
Supports the setting of the input/output mode at time ports. NOTE
A port in 10GE WAN mode does not support IEEE 1588v2.
IEEE 1588 ACR The IEEE 1588 ACR slave recovers synchronous clocks from IEEE 1588 packets.
The quality level of IEEE 1588 ACR clocks can be converted into that of synchronous Ethernet clocks.
NOTE A port in 10GE WAN mode does not support IEEE 1588 ACR.
CES ACR Supports the clock recovery function in absolute mode. Maximum number of CES ACR clocks: 24 The clock performance complies with the ITU-T G.823 Traffic
template.
Others QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies.
Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI ingresses.
Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping.
Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Table 2-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features
Item Description
Service Service Category Maximum Receiving Capability
Service Port
Description Connector
SDH service 26xSTM-1 S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports
STM-1 SFP electrical ports
optical port: LC
Electrical port: SAA straight female
14xSTM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports
LC
2xSTM-16 S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports
LC
PDH service 252xE1/T1 E1 (75/120-ohm)/T1 (100-ohm)
Anea 96
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description electrical ports
18xE3/T3 E3 (75-ohm)/T3 (75-ohm) electrical ports
SMB
Ethernet service: Ethernet private line
(EPL) services Ethernet virtual private
line (EVPL) services Ethernet private LAN
(EPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge)
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad bridges)
48xFE 10/100BASE-T(X)
RJ45
6xGE 1000BASE-SX/LX/VX/ZX
1000BASE-T
LC
Protection SNCP SNCP at the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms
Ring MSP Ring MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms
Linear MSP Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 linear MSP protection
groups: 13 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms
Maintenance
PRBS Supported
Port mirroring
EFS8 supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services. Supports local port mirroring. Supports ingress and egress port mirroring.
Synchronization
Physical layer clocks: Including external clocks, line clocks, tributary clocks, and internal
clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port).
Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 2 Quick Reference
Item Description SSM protocols
Tributary retiming and transparent transmission of tributary clocks Locked mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
3 System Architecture and Service Access
About This Chapter The chapter describes the equipment's system architecture and service access.
3.1 System Architecture
The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (TDM and packet domains) device. This section describes its functional units and the relationship between these units.
3.2 Service Types
This section describes the maximum service access capabilities, service ports, and boards providing specific service types for the OptiX OSN 550.
3.1 System Architecture The OptiX OSN 550 is a dual-domain (TDM and packet domains) device. This section describes its functional units and the relationship between these units.
The OptiX OSN 550 consists of the following functional units: service interface unit, TDM cross-connect unit, packet switching unit, system control and communication unit, clock unit, auxiliary interface unit, fan unit, and power supply unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
Figure 3-1 System architecture of OptiX OSN 550
Synchronous/Asynchronous dataExternal alarm
System control and communication unit
-48 V/-60 V DC
Orderwire
Ethernet signal
VC-4 signal
FE/GE/10GEE1 (CES/ATM/IMA)
STM-1/4/16
External clock
110 V/220 V AC
E1 (TDM)/T1/E3/T3
Service interface
unit
TDM cross-
connect unit
Packet switching
unit
NMS
DCN
Clock unit
Fan unit
Power supply
unit
Control and communication bus & Clock bus
Cross-connect busOptical/Electrical service
Auxiliary interface
unit
Backplane
Table 3-1 Function units of the OptiX OSN 550
Function Unit Function
Service interface unit
Receives/Transmits TDM E1/T1/E3/T3 signals. Receives/Transmits ATM/IMA E1 signals. Receives/Transmits STM-1/4/16 signals. Receives/Transmits Ethernet signals. Performs E1/channelized STM-1/ATM/Ethernet PWE3
emulation.
TDM cross-connect unit
Provides the cross-connect function and grooms TDM services.
Packet switching unit
Processes Ethernet services and forwards packets. Processes MPLS labels and forwards packets. Processes PW labels and forwards packets.
System control and Performs system communication and control.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
Function Unit Function communication unit Configures and manages the system.
Collects alarms and monitors performance. Processes overhead bytes.
Clock unit Traces clock sources and provides clock signals for the system. Provides the input/output port for external clocks.
Auxiliary interface unit
Provides the orderwire phone port. Provides the synchronous/asynchronous data port. Provides the external alarm input/output port.
Power supply unit Connects to -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies. Connects to 110 V to 220 V AC power supplies.
Fan unit Cools the NE.
3.2 Service Types This section describes the maximum service access capabilities, service ports, and boards providing specific service types for the OptiX OSN 550.
3.2.1 Types of Supported Services Different boards providing a wide variety of service ports can be deployed on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-2 lists the services supported by the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-2 Types of supported services
Service Category
Service Type
Service Rate
Board Reference Standard
Packet
10 GE LAN service
10.31 Gbit/s PCXLX/PCXX/EX1 IEEE 802.3ae
10 GE WAN service
9.95 Gbit/s PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
GE service (optical port)
1000 Mbit/s PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB/EM6F/EG4C
IEEE 802.3z
GE service (electrical port)
1000 Mbit/s EM6T/EM6F/EG4C
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
Service Category
Service Type
Service Rate
Board Reference Standard
FE service (optical port)
100 Mbit/s EF8F/EM6F/EG4C IEEE 802.3u
FE service (electrical port)
10/100 Mbit/s
EM6T/EM6F
ATM/IMA/E1 CES service
2.048 Mbit/s
MD1 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.823
Channelized STM-1 CES service
155.52 Mbit/s
CQ1 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.841 ITU-T G.842 IETF RFC 1661 IETF RFC 1990
SDH STM-1 standard service
155.52 Mbit/s
SL1D/SL1Q/PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL1
ITU-T G.707 ITU-T G.691 ITU-T G.957 ITU-T G.693 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.825
STM-4 standard or concatenation service
622.08 Mbit/s
SL4D/PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL4
STM-16 standard or concatenation service
2.5 Gbit/s PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL16
PDH E1 service 2.048 Mbit/s
SP3D ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.823 ITU-T G.783 ITU-T G.824 ITU-T G.742
T1 service 1.544 Mbit/s
SP3D ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.823 ITU-T G.824 ITU-T G.783
T3 service 44.736 Mbit/s
PL3T ITU-T G.703 ITU-T G.824
E3 service 34.368 PL3T ITU-T G.703
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
Service Category
Service Type
Service Rate
Board Reference Standard
Mbit/s ITU-T G.823
EoS FE service 10/100 Mbit/s
EFS8 IEEE 802.3u
GE service 1000 Mbit/s EGT1 IEEE 802.3z
FE: Fast Ethernet GE: Gigabit Ethernet
3.2.2 Access Capacities This section describes access capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured in the OptiX OSN 550.
Access Capacity in Packet Mode Table 3-3 lists access capacities in packet mode when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-3 Access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in packet mode
Board 10GE (Optical Port)
GE (Optical Port)
GE (Electrical Port)
FE (Optical Port)
FE (Electrical Port)
ATM/IMA/E1 CES
Channelized STM-1 CES
PCXLX 4 20 20 48 36 192 24
PCXX 4 20 20 48 36 192 24
PCXLG 2 22 20 48 36 192 24
PCXGA 0 22 20 48 36 192 24
PCXGB 2 22 20 48 36 192 24
Access Capacity in TDM Mode Table 3-4 lists access capacities in TDM mode when different system control, switching, and timing boards are configured on the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 3-4 Access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM mode
Board STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 E1/T1 E3/T3 FE GE
PCXLX 26 14 2 252 18 48 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 3 System Architecture and Service Access
Board STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 E1/T1 E3/T3 FE GE
PCXX 24 12 0 252 18 48 6
PCXLG 26 14 2 252 18 48 6
PCXGA 24 12 0 252 18 48 6
PCXGB 24 12 0 252 18 48 6
CXL1 26 12 0 252 18 48 6
CXL4 24 14 0 252 18 48 6
CXL16 24 12 2 252 18 48 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
4 Product Features
About This Chapter This chapter describes equipment features in terms of available service types, protection, and synchronization.
4.1 Services Supported
The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet services, ATM/IMA/E1 services, channelized STM-1, EoS services, SDH services, and PDH services.
4.2 Redundancy and Protection
The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiple redundancy and protection schemes.
4.3 Synchronization
The OptiX OSN 550 supports IEEE 1588v2, synchronous Ethernet clock, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit/s clocks and can provide an end-to-end clock transport solution when deployed with MSTP or PTN products.
4.1 Services Supported The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet services, ATM/IMA/E1 services, channelized STM-1, EoS services, SDH services, and PDH services.
4.1.1 Service Overview (Packet) This section describes the packet service types supported by the equipment.
Ethernet Services (E-Line and E-LAN) The OptiX OSN 550 supports point-to-point E-Line services and multipoint-to-multipoint E-LAN services.
Standardization organizations such as ITU-T, IETF and MEF stipulate the model frames for L2 Ethernet services. Table 4-1 lists these model frames. In this document, the L2 Ethernet services are of the model frame stipulated by MEF.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Table 4-1 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulation
Service Type Service Multiplexing
Transport Tunnel
IETF Model
ITU-T Model
MEF Model
Point-to-point service
Line Physically isolated
Physically isolated
- EPL E-Line
Virtual Line
VLAN VLAN - EVPL
MPLS VPWS
Multipoint-to-multipoint service
LAN Physically isolated
Physically isolated
- EPLAN E-LAN
Virtual LAN
VLAN Physically isolated
- EVPLAN
VLAN -
MPLS VPLS
Table 4-2 lists the E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 4-2 E-Line and E-LAN services supported by the OptiX OSN 550
Service Service Type
E-Line Native Ethernet services
Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service
VLAN-based E-Line services
QinQ-based E-Line services
ETH PWE3 services
E-Line services carried by PWs
E-LAN Native Ethernet services
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ETH PWE3 services
E-LAN services carried by PWs
E-Line Service Figure 4-1 illustrates the E-Line service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company A has two branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has two branches in City 2 and City 3. Company C has two branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Companies A, B, and C require data communication. The OptiX OSN equipment can separately provide a
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
private line service for Companies A, B, and C to meet the communication requirement. In addition, the service data is completely isolated.
Figure 4-1 E-Line service
Nationwide/Globalcarrier Ethernet Metro
carrier EthernetMetro
carrier Ethernet
Metrocarrier Ethernet
Company A
City 3City 1
Company A
E-Line1E-Line2E-Line3
Company C Company B
Company C Company B
City 2
E-LAN Service Figure 4-2 illustrates the E-LAN service provided by the OptiX OSN equipment.
Company Z is headquartered in City 3. Branch A of the company is located in City 1 and City 2, and Branch B of the company is located in City 1, City 2, and City 3. Branch A and Branch B do not communicate with each other, and the data of them should be separated from each other. The headquarters, however, need to communicate with all the branches and need to access the Internet.
The OptiX OSN equipment can be used to provide the E-LAN service. Different VLAN tags are used to identify service data from different branches. In this manner, the headquarters can communicate with the branches and the data from different branches is isolated. In addition, the VLAN is used to isolate the Internet data accessed by the headquarters from the internal service data.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-2 E-LAN service
Nationwide/Globalcarrier Ethernet
Metrocarrier Ethernet
Metrocarrier Ethernet
Metrocarrier Ethernet
Headquarter
Branch B
City 3
Branch A
City 1
Branch B
Branch A
City 2VLAN1VLAN2
Branch B Branch A
ISP
VLAN3
CES Services The circuit emulation service (CES) helps to solve the problem of insufficient optical fiber resources in the access ring and allows TDM services to be transparently transmitted across the pure packet mode.
At the physical layer on the UNI side, the OptiX OSN equipment is interconnected with a CE through the following physical channels for accessing CES services:
Channelized STM-1 E1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-3 Networking diagram of the CES
Emulation Mode The OptiX NG-SDH series equipment supports two types of CES services: structure-aware TDM circuit emulation service over packet switched network (CESoPSN) CES and structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP) CES.
In the case of CESoPSN CES:
The equipment senses the frame format, frame alignment mode, and timeslot information in the TDM circuit.
The equipment processes the overheads and extracts the payloads in TDM frames. Then, the equipment loads timeslots to the packet payload in a certain sequence. As a result, the services in each timeslot are fixed and visible in packets.
In the case of SAToP CES:
The equipment does not sense any format in the TDM signal. Instead, it considers TDM signals as bit flows at a constant rate, and therefore the entire bandwidth of TDM signals is emulated.
The overheads and payloads in TDM signals are transparently transmitted.
Service Type CES services are classified into UNI-UNI CES services and UNI-UNI CES services by service implementation point.
UNI-UNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-4, a single OptiX OSN NE completes access of TDM services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-4 UNI-UNI CES services
BTS
BSC
TDM link
NE
PSN
UNI-NNI CES services As shown in Figure 4-5, the OptiX OSN NEs set UNI-NNI CES services. In the case of a UNI-NNI CES service, the OptiX OSN NEs access customer TDM services through E1 ports; CES PWs are created between the OptiX OSN NEs to emulate end-to-end TDM services.
Figure 4-5 UNI-NNI CES services
BTS2
BSC
BTS1
TDM link
NE
NE
NE
PSN
Tunnel
PW
ATM/IMA Services The OptiX OSN equipment supports ATM/IMA services in packet mode.
ATM Services ATM stands for asynchronous transfer mode, which is implemented based on cells. In ATM mode, the ATM PWE3 technology is used to emulate ATM services on a packet switched network (PSN). Therefore, traditional ATM services can traverse the PSN. ATM service
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
networks can be classified into three types: one-to-one, N-to-one or ATM-TRANS, according to the encapsulation mode of ATM PWE3 packets.
Figure 4-6 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in one-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
Figure 4-7 Typical application of ATM PWE3 (in N-to-one cell encapsulation mode)
The cell encapsulation modes at both ends of a PW must be the same.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
IMA Services
The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology multiplexes multiple low-speed ATM links into a high-speed link.
The IMA technology provides inverse multiplexing of an ATM cell stream over multiple low-speed links and retrieves the original stream at the far-end from these physical links. Figure 4-8 shows how IMA transmits services.
Figure 4-8 IMA transmission
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3
IMA group
ATM cell stream ATM cell stream
The IMA technology helps to group multiple physical links to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. When the member links in the IMA group are dynamically added/deleted, or fail/recover, the logical link changes only in bandwidth. The services on the logical link are not interrupted only when the bandwidth of the logical link is not lower than the required minimum bandwidth.
With the IMA technology, the transport network can transmit ATM services from customer equipment on an IMA group formed by multiple low-speed links (for example, the three E1 links shown in Figure 4-9), therefore increasing link bandwidth utilization and providing link protection.
Figure 4-9 Application of the IMA technology
IMA group
NodeBE1 link
Packet transmit equipment
4.1.2 Service Overview (TDM) This section describes the TDM service types supported by the equipment.
Ethernet Services (EPL/EVPL/EPLAN/EVPLAN) ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the following types of Ethernet services:
EPL Service
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service
EPL Service The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 4-10, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable transmission of services.
Figure 4-10 EPL service based on port
VCTRUNK 1PORT1
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2
POTR1
A
NE 1 NE 2
BPORT2
OptiX OSNequipment
Enterpriseuser
A
B
EVPL Service The OptiX OSN equipment adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 4-11, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of Company A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-11 Port-shared EVPL services
Headquarters ofcompany A
OptiX OSNequipment
Enterpriseuser
NE 1 NE 2
PORT1
PORT2
VLAN100
PORT1
VLAN100
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
Department 1
Department 2
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN equipment adopts three ways to realize convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
− EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 4-12. − EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 4-13. − EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-12 EVPL service based on VLAN ID
Communityuser
Cyber cafeuser
OptiX OSNequipment
VCTRUNK
AA'
NE 1 NE 2
B
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN100
VLAN200
1 PORT2 1PORT PORTPORT2
B'
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-13 EVPL service based on MPLS
NE 1 NE 2
PPE P PE
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
`
Add label
Department B
DepartmentA
Branch 1
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Strip label
Branch 2
Department B
Department A
Figure 4-14 EVPL service based on QinQ
Department B
Department A
NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK1
PORT2
PORT1PORT1
PORT2
`
C-Aware S-Aware S-Aware C-Aware
Company A OptiX OSN equipment
Add label Strip label
Branch 1 Branch 2
Department B
Department A
EPLAN Service Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN equipment adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning. The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-15 EPLAN service
NE 1 NE 2
NE31
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
PORT1PORT1 VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3 ofcompany A
Port 1
Department 1 ofcompany A
Accesspoint
Company A OptiX OSNequipment
Port 1
Department 2 ofcompany A
EVPLAN Service The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 4-16, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN equipment adopt VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-16 EVPLAN service
NE 1 NE 2
NE3
PORT1PORT2
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK2
LSP LSP PORT1PORT2
VC
TRU
NK
1
PO
RT1
PO
RT2 V
CT R
UN
K2
S-Aware S-Aware
S-Aware
C-AwareS-Aware
C-Aware
VB
VB
VB
Port 1
Department 3 of company B
Department 3 of company A
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1
Port 2
Department 2 of company B Department 2
of company A Department 1 of company B
Department 1 of company A
Acess point Company A Company B OptiX OSN
equipment
Port 2
C-Aware
SDH/PDH Service This section describes the service support in TDM mode.
The OptiX OSN 550 can process SDH services, PDH services, and Ethernet services.
Table 4-3 lists the service categories that the OptiX OSN 550 supports in TDM mode.
Table 4-3 Service categories that the OptiX OSN 550 supports in TDM mode
Service Category Description
SDH service Standard SDH services: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16
Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c
Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC-4-Xv (X≤8), VC-3-Xv (X≤24), VC-12-Xv (X≤63)
PDH service E1/T1 and E3/T3 services
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
4.2 Redundancy and Protection The OptiX OSN 550 supports multiple redundancy and protection schemes.
4.2.1 Equipment Level Protection The equipment supports several equipment level protection schemes.
Power Redundancy 1+1 backup for power supply: two channels of -48 V DC power supplies are connected by using two PIU boards for backup.
As shown in Figure 4-17, the OptiX OSN 550 is configured with a pair of DC power supplies for backup. Normal operations are not affected if any external -48 V DC power supply fails.
Figure 4-17 DC power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
PIU
PIU
FAN
XXX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Mutual backup DC input
As shown in Figure 4-18, the OptiX OSN 550 is configured with a pair of AC power supplies for backup. Normal operations are not affected if any external 100 V/240 V AC power supply fails.
Figure 4-18 AC power redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis
SLOT 1
SLOT 3
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
SLO
T91
SLO
T 92
SLO
T 93
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
XXX
XX
X
XX
XX
XX
XX
APIU APIU
Mutual backup AC input
Fan Redundancy Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system. The failure of a single fan does not affect the operation of other fans.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Board Redundancy The equipment provides 1+1 backup between the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-19 Board redundancy for the OptiX OSN 550 chassis (system control, switching, and timing board)
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
SLOT 7 SLOT 8PI
UPI
U
FAN
XX
XXX
XXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXX
XXX
XX
XX
XX
1+1 backup between active and standby
4.2.2 Network Level Protection (Packet) This section describes packet domain protection schemes, including tunnel APS, PW APS, MSTP, ERPS, LPT, and LAG.
PW APS This section defines PW APS and describes its purpose.
Definition PW APS is a function that protects PWs based on the APS protocol. When the working PW is faulty, PW APS switches services to a preconfigured protection PW.
The PW APS function supported by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:
End-to-end protection for PWs. The working PW and protection PW are carried in different tunnels but have the same
local and remote PEs. The protection PW in the PW APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic. The PW OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1711) or MPLS-TP OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1731)
mechanism is used to detect faults in PWs, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose PW APS improves the reliability of service transmission in PWs.
As shown in Figure 4-20, when the PW OAM mechanism detects a fault in the working PW, services are switched to the protection PW for transmission.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-20 Example of PW APS
PE1
PE2
PE3
Protect switching
PE1 PE4
PE2
PE3
Service
Working PW
Protection PW
Working PW
Protection PW
Packet transmission equipment
PE4
Tunnel APS This section defines tunnel APS and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition Tunnel APS is a function that protects tunnels based on the APS protocol. When the working tunnel is faulty, tunnel APS switches services to a preconfigured protection tunnel.
Tunnel APS supported by the OptiX OSN 550 has the following features:
Provides end-to-end protection for tunnels. The working tunnel and protection tunnel have the same ingress and egress nodes. The protection tunnel in the Tunnel APS protection pair does not carry extra traffic.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
The MPLS OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1711) or MPLS-TP OAM (based on ITU-T Y.1731)
mechanism is used to detect faults in tunnels, and the ingress and egress nodes exchange APS protocol packets to achieve protection switching.
Purpose Tunnel APS is used to improve the reliability of service transmission over tunnels. Tunnel APS is used in two typical scenarios: co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels, and co-sourced tunnels with different sinks. Figure 4-21 and Figure 4-22 show the typical application scenarios.
For co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels, a tunnel APS protection group is created between PE1 and PE2. Generally, services are transmitted on the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty, APS occurs and the services are switched to the protection tunnel.
Figure 4-21 Typical application of tunnel APS (for co-sourced and co-sinked tunnels)
NodeB
RNCPE1
Tunnel APS
PE2
NodeB
Tunnel1
PSNTunnel APS
Tunnel2
Working Tunnel
Protection Tunnel
For co-sourced tunnels with different sinks, tunnel APS works with MC-LAG to implement cross-equipment protection. As shown in Figure 4-22, PE1 is an access-layer NE, and PE2 and PE3 are NEs at the backbone convergence layer. A tunnel APS protection group is created between PE1 and PE2 and between PE1 and PE3. Generally, services are transmitted on the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty, APS occurs and the services are switched to the protection tunnel.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-22 Typical application of tunnel APS (for co-sourced tunnels with different sinks)
NodeB
PE1
PE3
PE2
MC-LAG
RNC
PSN
Tunnel APS A
S
Working Tunnel
Multi-chassis synchronous communication
Active (carrying services)
Standby (not carrying services)
Protection Tunnel
A
S
ERPS This section defines Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) and describes the purpose of this feature.
Definition Based on the automatic protection switching (APS) protocol and protection switching mechanism, ERPS defines a protocol for Ethernet ring protection. ERPS is applicable to the Ethernet ring topology at the Ethernet Layer 2, and provides protection for LAN services on an Ethernet ring.
Purpose When a ring network is configured with ERPS, in normal cases, the main node blocks its port on one side so that all the services are transmitted through the port on the other side. In this manner, service loops can be prevented. If a segment of links fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL owner unblocks the preceding port and the services that cannot be transmitted over the faulty point can be transmitted through this port. In this manner, ring protection is achieved.
The Ethernet ring network as shown in Figure 4-23 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the RPL owner (NE D) blocks the port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are transmitted over the link NE A<->NE B<->NE C<->NE D. When the link between NE A<->NE B becomes faulty, NE D unblocks the port that is blocked so that the services can be transmitted over the link NE A<->NE D<->NE C<->NE B.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-23 Implementation of the ERPS
Protection switching
Link
NE B
NE A
NE C
NE D
NE B
NE A
NE C
NE D
Failure
Ethernet service direction
Blocked port
LAG Link aggregation combines multiple links attached to the same equipment into a LAG so that the bandwidth of the LAG increases and links are made more reliable. The aggregated links are treated as a single logical link.
A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that transmits data at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. It does not have any impact on the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because links have a one-to-one mapping with ports on Ethernet networks.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
As shown in Figure 4-24, the LAG provides the following functions:
Increased bandwidth LAGs provide users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. By combining multiple physical links into one logical link, users obtain a logical link with higher bandwidth without upgrading existing equipment, since the bandwidth of the logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidth of all combined physical links. The aggregation module uses a load sharing algorithm to share traffic among the combined links.
Increased availability The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in the LAG take over. Dynamic backup occurs only among links in the LAG; other links are not included.
Figure 4-24 Link aggregation group
LAG
Ethernetpackets
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3 Ethernetpackets
LPT This section defines LPT and provides the purpose of this feature.
Definition Link-state pass through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service network and then instructs the equipment at both ends of the network to switch to a backup network. LPT ensures normal data transmission. As shown in Figure 4-25, LPT-enabled NE1 and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. When router A and router B detect a link fault between them, they immediately switch to the backup network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-25 Typical application of LPT
NE1 NE2Access link 1 Access link 2Router A Router B
Service network
Backup network
Working link
Protection link
Purpose LPT enabled access equipment detects link faults and immediately switches to a backup network.
MSTP This topic defines MSTP and describes the purpose of this feature.
Definition The spanning tree protocol (STP) is used in network loops. This protocol uses algorithms to break a loop network into a loop-free tree network to prevent packets from cycling endlessly in the loop network. See Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Diagram of the STP
Switch A
Root: Switch A
Switch B Switch C
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
The rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is an optimized version of STP. RSTP stabilizes network topology more quickly than STP. RSTP is compatible with STP. STP packets and RSTP packets can be differentiated by the bridge that uses the RSTP for calculating the spanning tree.
Compared with STP and RSTP, MSTP maximizes link bandwidth usage by setting up several independent spanning trees.
Purpose STP/RSTP meets the following requirements:
Any activated bridge topology can be configured as a single spanning tree. Redundant data loops between two stations in a network topology should be removed.
The spanning tree topology can be configured to protect against bridge faults or route interruptions. Temporary data loops can be prevented by automatically accepting the bridges and bridge ports of the bridges that are newly added into the LAN.
A topology that has been activated can be predicted and repeated. In addition, the topology can be selected by managing algorithm parameters.
Operations to the end stations are transparent. For example, the end stations do not know whether they are attached to a single LAN or a bridged LAN.
A small part of the available link bandwidth is used to create and maintain a spanning tree. Bandwidth does not increase with the expanding network scale.
STP/RSTP have shortcomings that have become apparent as VLAN technology has developed. After the STP/RSTP is enabled, a loop network is broken into a single spanning tree and the blocked links do not carry any traffic. This wastes bandwidth.
MSTP has fixed this defect in STP and RSTP in addition to stabilizing the network topology. MSTP provides a load sharing mechanism that enables the traffic of different VLANs to be transmitted over their respective trails.
MSTP divides a switching network into different regions, called MST regions. Multiple spanning trees that are independent of each other exist in each region. Each spanning tree is called a multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI).
When MSTP is enabled, VLAN mapping tables specify the mapping relationships between VLANs and MSTIs. Each VLAN in an MST region corresponds to one MSTI and only this MSTI can transmit data for this VLAN. One MSTI, however, may be mapped to multiple VLANs.
Consider the network in Figure 4-27 as an example. VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 packets are transmitted over the network. When STP/RSTP is enabled, a single spanning tree that uses switch A as the root switch is generated and the links between switch B and switch C are blocked. Hence, the bandwidth of this link is not utilized.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-27 Limitations of the STP/RSTP
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
Spanning tree
Root switch
Host A
Host B Host C
Blocked port
VLAN 1VLAN 2
If MSTP is enabled and this network is an MST region, then VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 are each mapped to an MSTI. Figure 4-28 shows the network topology. On the ring:
MSTI 1 uses switch A as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 1. MSTI 2 uses switch C as the root switch to forward packets of VLAN 2.
Different VLANs are forwarded over different trails and all VLAN packets are forwarded correctly. Load sharing is achieved.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-28 MSTP improvement
MSTI 2 -> VLAN 2
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
VLAN 1VLAN 2
Host A
Host B Host C
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
VLAN 1 VLAN 1
Switch A
Switch B Switch C
VLAN 2
MSTI 1 -> VLAN 1
VLAN 2
Root switch
As shown in Figure 4-29, when equipment uses two different trails to access the OptiX OSN 550, you can configure the OptiX OSN 550 ports connected to the user network into a port group. This port group, together with a switch on the user network, can run the MSTP. If a service access link becomes faulty, MSTP generates a spanning tree topology to provide protection for a user network that is configured with multiple access points.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-29 Typical MSTP scenario on the OptiX OSN 550
CIST
Root Root
Port group
Blocked Port
ML-PPP This section defines ML-PPP and describes the purpose of using this feature on transport networks.
Definition The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) is a link layer protocol based on the Serial Line Interface Protocol (SLIP). PPP provides a standard method for encapsulating multiple types of protocol datagrams (including IP, IPX, and AppleTalk) on a point-to-point link.
The Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP) is an extended PPP protocol. It is used to bind multiple low-rate PPP links into a virtual ML-PPP link. An ML-PPP link is also called a Multilink Protocol (MP) group. ML-PPP also supports packet splitting and recombination, therefore effectively reducing the transmission latency and increasing the maximum transfer unit (MTU) for a link.
Using the ML-PPP function brings a network the following benefits:
Increased bandwidth Load sharing and link backup Lower latency
Purpose ML-PPP links can bear MPLS tunnels so that the MPLS tunnels can traverse a TDM transport network.
As shown in Figure 4-30, MPLS packets in the MPLS tunnel are encapsulated in E1s and transmitted over the ML-PPP link through the TDM network. At the TDM network edge, the MPLS packets are decapsulated from E1s.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-30 Using an ML-PPP link to transmit services through a TDM network
Linear MSP The packet-based linear MSP uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching and thus to protect services. The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1:1 packet-based linear MSP.
1:1 Packet-based linear MSP 1:1 packet-based linear MSP requires one working path and one protection path. Common services are transmitted in the working path. When the working path becomes faulty, the service in this path is switched to the protection path. Figure 4-31 shows the application of 1:1 packet-based linear MSP.
The extra traffic can not be transmitted in the protection path.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-31 1:1 Packet-based linear MSP
Working path
Protection path
NE A NE B
Protection switching
NE A NE B
Common service
Working path
Protection path
Common service
Common service
Common service
Purpose The packet-based linear MSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching once the working path fails, and thus to protect services.
4.2.3 Network Level Protection (TDM) This section describes protection schemes including SNCP and linear MSP in the TDM domain.
LAG Link aggregation combines multiple links attached to the same equipment into a LAG so that the bandwidth of the LAG increases and links are made more reliable. The aggregated links are treated as a single logical link.
A LAG aggregates multiple physical links to form a logical link that transmits data at a higher rate. Link aggregation functions between adjacent equipment. It does not have any impact on the architecture of the entire network. Link aggregation is also called port aggregation because links have a one-to-one mapping with ports on Ethernet networks.
As shown in Figure 4-32, the LAG provides the following functions:
Increased bandwidth LAGs provide users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. By combining multiple physical links into one logical link, users obtain a logical link with higher bandwidth without upgrading existing equipment, since the bandwidth of the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
logical link is equal to the sum of the bandwidth of all combined physical links. The aggregation module uses a load sharing algorithm to share traffic among the combined links.
Increased availability The links in a LAG dynamically back up each other. When a link fails, the other links in the LAG take over. Dynamic backup occurs only among links in the LAG; other links are not included.
Figure 4-32 Link aggregation group
LAG
Ethernetpackets
Link 1
Link 2
Link 3 Ethernetpackets
LCAS This topic describes the LCAS in terms of background, function definition, and benefits to networks.
With the diverse and complex development of the services transmitted in the SDH network, the demands for various access bandwidths increasingly grow. As a result, the previous monotone bandwidth (such as a VC-4) no longer meets the requirement. Hence, the concatenation technology emerges as the times require. Concatenation is classified into adjacent concatenation and virtual concatenation. The latter is more flexible than the former and enjoys higher bandwidth utilization than the former does. Both the adjacent concatenation and virtual concatenation have the following problems:
When any physical channel fails, all the concatenated channels fail and all services are interrupted.
After services are set up, if you adjust the bandwidth of the services, the services are greatly affected.
The link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) technology emerges as a solution to the preceding problems. The LCAS improves and complements the virtual concatenation technology. The LCAS dynamically adjusts the number of virtual containers required for service mapping to meet the requirements of various service bandwidths. This elevates the bandwidth utilization and enhances the robustness of virtual concatenation.
The LCAS applies to only the virtually concatenated channels.
Adopting the LCAS function brings the network with the following benefits:
The LCAS dynamically adjusts (adds or deletes) the service bandwidth without affecting the availability of the existing services.
When some of the physical channels in a virtual concatenation group fail, with LCAS, the failed channels are shielded and the other physical channels still transport the services normally. This prevents the services from being interrupted when some of the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
physical channels fail. After the failed physical channels are restored, they can transport services.
LPT This section defines LPT and provides the purpose of this feature.
Definition Link-state pass through (LPT) detects a fault that occurs at a service access node or on a service network and then instructs the equipment at both ends of the network to switch to a backup network. LPT ensures normal data transmission. As shown in Figure 4-33, LPT-enabled NE1 and NE2 will disconnect their access links from router A and router B if access link 1, access link 2, or the service network becomes faulty. When router A and router B detect a link fault between them, they immediately switch to the backup network.
Figure 4-33 Typical application of LPT
NE1 NE2Access link 1 Access link 2Router A Router B
Service network
Backup network
Working link
Protection link
Purpose LPT enabled access equipment detects link faults and immediately switches to a backup network.
Ring MSP Ring MSP uses the multiplex section overhead (MSOH) bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching of services.
Two-Fiber Unidirectional Ring MSP On a two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP, one of the bidirectional STM-N lines is the working line, and the other is the protection line. As shown in Figure 4-34, the services on the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP are on diverse routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE D→NE A.
In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working line. When a fiber cut occurs and the working line becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working line of the faulty fiber to the protection line of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 4-34 shows the application of the two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE D→NE C→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A continues to be NE C→NE D→NE A.
Figure 4-34 Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP
Signal flow of services
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East
Protection switching
West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP
ring
Before protection switching
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber unidirectional MSP
ring
After protection switching
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Ring MSP
On a two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP, the first half of VC-4s on each STM-N line is allocated to the working channel, and the other half of VC-4s is allocated to the protection channel. As shown in Figure 4-35, the services on the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP are on uniform routes. Before the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE B→NE A.
In normal cases, services are transmitted on the working channel. The services transmitted on two fibers flow in inverse directions. When a fiber cut occurs and the working channel becomes unavailable, the services on the two ends of the faulty point are both switched from the working channel of the faulty fiber to the protection channel of the reverse directional fiber for transmission. Figure 4-35 shows the application of the two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP. After the protection switching, the signal flow of the services from NE A to NE C is NE A→NE D→NE C→NE B→NE C, and the signal flow of the services from NE C to NE A is NE C→NE B→NE C→NE D→NE A.
Figure 4-35 Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP
Signal flow of services
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East
Protection switching
West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber bidirectional MSP
ring
Before protection switching
NE A
NE B
NE C
NE D
East West
West
East
East
East
West
West
Two-fiber bidirectional MSP
ring
After protection switching
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Linear MSP
The linear MSP uses the K1 and K2 bytes in the multiplex section overhead to realize automatic protection switching. The OptiX OSN equipment supports 1+1 and 1:N linear MSP.
1+1 Linear MSP The 1+1 linear MSP requires one working channel and one protection channel. At the source node, the service is dually fed to the working channel and protection channel. At the sink node, the service is received from the working channel. When the working channel becomes faulty, the service is received from the protection channel. Figure 4-36 shows the application of the 1+1 linear MSP.
Figure 4-36 1+1 linear MSP
Working channel
Protection channel
NE A NE B
Protection switching
Working channel
Protection channel
NE A NE B
No extra traffic can be configured in the protection channel in a 1+1 linear MSP group.
1:N linear MSP The 1:N linear MSP requires N working channels and one protection channel. Common services are transmitted on the working channels, and extra traffic is transmitted on the protection channel. When a working channel becomes faulty, the service on the channel is switched to the protection channel. Therefore, the extra traffic is interrupted. Figure 4-37 shows the application of the 1:N linear MSP.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-37 1:N linear MSP
Workingchannel 1
Protectionchannel
NE A NE B
Protection switching
... ...
NE A NE B
... ...Workingchannel N
Workingchannel N
Workingchannel 1
Protectionchannel
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Extra traffic
Common service 1
Common service N
Purpose The LMSP scheme uses the MSOH bytes K1 and K2 to implement automatic protection switching once the working path fails, and therefore to protect services.
SNCP SNCP requires one working subnet and one protection subnet so that services can be dually-fed and selectively-received.
SNCP requires one working subnet and one protection subnet so that services can be dually-fed and selectively-received. If the working subnet fails to be connected or if its performance fails to meet requirements, the protection subnet takes over.
Figure 4-38 shows the application of SNCP.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-38 Application of SNCP
WorkingSNC
ProtectionSNC
Source end
NE A NE B
Sink end
NE A NE B
Protectionswitching
Source end Sink end
WorkingSNC
ProtectionSNC
4.3 Synchronization The OptiX OSN 550 supports IEEE 1588v2, synchronous Ethernet clock, 2 MHz, and 2 Mbit/s clocks and can provide an end-to-end clock transport solution when deployed with MSTP or PTN products.
When the OptiX OSN 550 uses IEEE 1588v2 to implement phase synchronization, it supports the following NE clock types: OC, TC, BC and TC+BC.
4.3.1 Requirements for Clock Synchronization This section describes frequency and phase synchronization requirements of service networks.
A service network, especially a radio access network (RAN), has stringent requirements for clock synchronization, and clock signals transmitted over a transport network must meet these requirements.
Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Table 4-4 lists clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks based on the wireless access mode.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Table 4-4 Clock synchronization requirements of mobile communication networks
Wireless Access Mode Precision of Frequency Synchronization
Precision of Phase Synchronization
GSM 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is not required.
WCDMA 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is not required.
TD-SCDMA 0.05 ppm ±1.5 us
CDMA2000 0.05 ppm ±3 us
WiMax FDD 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is not required.
WiMax TDD 0.011 ppm/3.5G, 7 carrier wave
±1 us
LTE FDD 0.05 ppm Phase synchronization is not required.
LTE TDD 0.05 ppm ±1.5 us
Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems
Billing and network management systems also require phase synchronization. Table 4-5 lists the phase synchronization requirements of some common systems.
Table 4-5 Phase synchronization requirements of other common systems
System Phase Synchronization Precision
Billing system 500 ms
Communication network management system
500 ms
Signaling system No. 7 1 ms
Positioning system 1 us (equivalent to a positioning precision of 300 m)
4.3.2 Clock and Time Synchronization (Packet) This section describes synchronization features including synchronous Ethernet clock and CES ACR in the packet domain.
Synchronous Ethernet Clock The synchronous Ethernet clock is a technology that extracts clock signals from serial bit streams on an Ethernet line, and transmits the extracted clock signals with services to implement the transfer of the clock signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
As SDH networks are evolving into data networks, carrier-level large-scale networks require synchronous Ethernet to transmit clock signals. The networkwide synchronous transmission idea of the SDH system needs to be introduced to the Ethernet design. Clock signals are transmitted from the core to the edge by using the Ethernet physical layer, which ensures synchronization for all types of real-time services.
Figure 4-39 shows the typical network to which synchronous Ethernet is applied networkwide. BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit clock signals to NE1 and NE2 through external clock ports. NE1 and NE2 transmit the clock signals to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals from the convergence layer to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide clock synchronization is achieved.
Figure 4-39 Typical network to which synchronous Ethernet is applied networkwide
2.5 Gbit/s chain
Access layer
Convergence layer
622 Mbit/s chain
GE ring
Clock information
OptiX OSN access equipment
OptiX OSN convergence equipment
Clock information
Node B Node B Node B
BITS1 BITS2
NE1 NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5 NE6 NE7
Clock information
155 Mbit/s chain
Figure 4-40 shows a typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR. BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit synchronous Ethernet clock signals to Router1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
and Router2 through external clock ports. Because Router1 and Router2 need to transmit the synchronous Ethernet clock signals to convergence-layer NEs (NE1 and NE2) through a non-transport network, they convert the synchronous Ethernet clock signals into IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals. After the IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals traverse the non-transport network and reach NE1 and NE2, the two NEs restore the signals into synchronous Ethernet clock signals and transmit them to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide clock synchronization is achieved.
Currently, the equipment supports only the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals into synchronous Ethernet signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-40 Typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR
Access layer
Convergence layer
OptiX OSN access equipment
OptiX OSN convergence equipment
Clock information
Clock information
Synchronous ethernet clock
Node B Node B Node B
BITS1 BITS2
NE1 NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5 NE6 NE7
IEEE 1588 ACR
Synchronous ethernet clock
Synchronous ethernet clock
Synchronous ethernet clock
Clock information
Router1 Router2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
IEEE 1588v2
This section provides the definition of IEEE 1588v2 and describes its purpose.
Definition The IEEE 1588v2 defines a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems. It defines the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) to synchronize independent clocks running on separate nodes of a distributed measurement and control system to a high degree of accuracy and precision. The IEEE 1588v2 standard supports time synchronization accuracy in the submicrosecond range.
Synchronization involves clock synchronization (also called frequency synchronization) or time synchronization. The IEEE 1588v2 standard mainly applicable to time synchronization, and it can also be used for clock synchronization.
Clock synchronization To achieve synchronization of clocks for two devices, the pulses of the clocks must be at the same frequency and keep a constant phase difference.
Time synchronization To achieve time synchronization, the pulses of the clocks must be at the same frequency and have a very small phase difference as required, and the times indicated by the clocks must be measured in the same timescale. The commonly used timescales include universal coordinated time (UTC) and international atomic time (TAI, from the French name Temps Atomique International).
Purpose In the applications on transmission networks, the IEEE 1588v2 standard provides an approach to 1588v2 time synchronization on a network basis, with a synchronization accuracy in the microsecond range; as well, the IEEE 1588v2 standard helps in transparent transmission of 1588v2 time signals. As such, the IEEE 1588v2 standard, as an alternative to the global positioning system (GPS) or other complex timing systems, can be used to provide 1588v2 time for NodeBs or eNodeBs. Figure 4-41 illustrates an application example wherein the IEEE 1588v2 standard helps to synchronize the time of NodeBs distributed in a CDMA2000 or TD-SCDMA communication system.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-41 Time synchronization of NodeBs implemented by the IEEE 1588v2 standard
RNC
TimesynchronizationPTP node
NodeB NodeB NodeB
BITS
IEEE 1588 ACR This section defines IEEE 1588 ACR and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) is a technology used to achieve frequency synchronization between the clock equipment that supports the IEEE 1588v2 standard. To be specific, the master equipment encapsulates the local system clock into a Sync packet as a timestamp and transmits the Sync packet to a packet switched network (PSN), which forwards the Sync packet to the slave equipment. On receiving the Sync packet, the slave equipment extracts the timestamp from the Sync packet and recovers the clock frequency by using the ACR algorithm. In this way, the clock frequency of the PTP equipment at the two ends of a PSN is synchronized.
IEEE 1588 ACR achieves only frequency synchronization but not time synchronization.
Purpose With the IEEE 1588 ACR technology applied on a transport network, the clock frequency is carried in an IEEE 1588v2 packet, which traverses an asynchronous PSN. As a result, the clock frequency of the equipment at the two ends of the PSN is synchronized.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
In the network as shown in Figure 4-42, the PTP node on the RNC side encapsulates the clock frequency of the building integrated timing supply (BITS) equipment into an IEEE 1588v2 packet, which traverses the asynchronous PSN. On receiving the IEEE 1588v2 packet, the PTP nodes on the NodeB side recover the clock frequency of the BITS equipment from the IEEE 1588v2 packet by using the ACR algorithm, and send the clock frequency to the NodeBs. In this way, the clock frequencies of the NodeBs are synchronized with the clock frequency of the RNC.
Figure 4-42 IEEE 1588 ACR frequency synchronization
NodeB
NodeB
NodeB
RNC
BITS
PTP node
Transparenttransmission of
frequency
Frequencysynchronization
Router/Switch
PSN
Equipment on a transport network supports the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals from a non-transport network into synchronous Ethernet clock signals to achieve networkwide frequency synchronization.
As shown in Figure 4-43, BITS1 and BITS2 respectively transmit synchronous Ethernet clock signals to Router1 and Router 2 through external clock ports. Because Router1 and Router2 need to transmit the synchronous Ethernet clock signals to convergence-layer NEs (NE1 and NE2) through a non-transport network, they convert the synchronous Ethernet clock signals into IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals. After the IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals traverse the non-transport network and reach NE1 and NE2, the two NEs restore the signals into synchronous Ethernet clock signals and transmit them to NE3. NE3 transmits the clock signals to access-layer NEs. The access-layer NEs transmit the clock signals to NodeBs. In this manner, networkwide frequency synchronization is achieved.
Currently, the equipment supports only the conversion of IEEE 1588 ACR clock signals into synchronous Ethernet signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Figure 4-43 Typical network that uses both synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 ACR
Access layer
Convergence layer
OptiX OSN access equipment
OptiX OSN convergence equipment
Clock information
Clock information
Synchronous ethernet clock
Node B Node B Node B
BITS1 BITS2
NE1 NE2
NE3 NE4
NE5 NE6 NE7
IEEE 1588 ACR
Synchronous ethernet clock
Synchronous ethernet clock
Synchronous ethernet clock
Clock information
Router1 Router2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
CES ACR
This section defines CES ACR and describes the purpose of using this feature.
Definition CES ACR uses the adaptive clock recovery (ACR) technology to recover clock synchronization information carried by CES packets. CES ACR is available in two types: standard and enhanced.
In a standard CES ACR solution, the source end (Master) uses the local clock information as the timestamp in a Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packet header and encapsulates the local clock information in a CES packet. The sink end (Slave) recovers the clock using the timestamp in the packet. This method prevents signal impairment during the transmission.
The OptiX OSN 550 adopts the enhanced timestamp clock solution. That is, clocks can be recovered based on SN in CES packets rather than timestamps in RTP packet headers. See Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 CES ACR clock solution
PSN
PE1 PE2BTS BSC
Packet transmission equipment
CES
Primaryreference
clock
E1
E1CES
Master
SN
ProcessingProcessing
SN
CESE1
Slave
E1
SN: Sequnce Number
Purpose In the packet domain, CES ACR is mainly used to transparently transmit E1 clocks in the PSN. For details, see CES ACR Clock Transparent Transmission Solution.
4.3.3 Clock Synchronization (TDM) Clock synchronization on the entire network helps to transmit services normally.
Definition Clock: The electronic circuit in a computer that generates a steady stream of timing pulses.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 4 Product Features
Purpose
Clock synchronization ensures that all the digital devices on a communications network work at the same nominal frequency, and therefore minimizes the impacts of slips, burst bit errors, phase jumps, jitters, and wanders on digital communications systems. Clock synchronization also minimizes pointer justifications on SDH devices. Therefore, clock synchronization is the precondition and basis for the normal operation of a network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
5 Hardware and Structure
About This Chapter This section describes the chassis, boards, and external components of the equipment.
5.1 Chassis
This section describes the structure, slot layout, and access capacity of the chassis.
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating in a high-temperature and dust-concentrated outdoor environment needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
5.3 Board Category
This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. Different boards provide the equipment with different functions.
5.1 Chassis This section describes the structure, slot layout, and access capacity of the chassis.
5.1.1 Chassis Structure This section describes the chassis structure and equipment labels.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
Board installation
area
SLOT9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)SLOT10
(PIU) SLOT11
(FAN)SLOT92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
SLOT 1 (EXT)
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT)
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8SLOT91
(PIU)SLOT
93(FAN)
Power supply boardsSystem control, switching, and timing boards
Extended boards
Fan board
1
2
34
1
2
3
4
W
H
D
An OptiX OSN 550 NE can automatically save its NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask to its backplane. After a new system control, switching, and timing board replaces an original one, the NE automatically uses the saved information. Therefore, you do not need to set the NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask for the substitute board.
Ventilation Design The chassis is densely covered with small air holes. Through these holes, air is let in from the left and out from the right by fans.
Ensure the smooth flow of air inside and around the equipment. Do not block the air intake vents and air exhaust vents of subracks when cabling. Keep the top of subracks clean.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Figure 5-1 Ventilation design of the OptiX OSN 550
AIR IN
AIR OUT
Label Description Table 5-1 provides the description of the labels on the chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 5-1 Description of labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection label Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the grounding position of the chassis.
Fan warning label Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
Power caution label Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks.
CLASS1LASER
PRODUCT
Laser safety class label
The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum optical power of the optical port is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Label Label Name Description
合格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD
华为技术有限公司 中国制造MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
Qualification card label
Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.
50
RoHS label Indicates that the equipment contains certain hazardous substances specified in the RoHS directive. The equipment needs to be recycled after the environment-friendly use period of 50 years expires.
DC power
AC power
Product nameplate label
Indicates the product name and certification.
5.1.2 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (Packet) This section provides switching capacities and slot access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in packet mode.
Switching Capacities (Packet Mode) Table 5-2 lists packet switching capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are installed.
Table 5-2 Switching capacities of the OptiX OSN 550
Board Maximum Switching Capacity (Gbit/s)
PCXLX 60
PCXX 60
PCXLG 40
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Maximum Switching Capacity (Gbit/s)
PCXGA 20
PCXGB 40
Access Capacities of Slots (Packet Mode) Figure 5-2 provides access capacities of slots when PCXLX/PCXX boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550.
Figure 5-2 Access capacities of slots when PCXLX/PCXX boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLOT
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)SLO
T10
(PIU)
SLOT11
(FAN)SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
10Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8 SLOT
91
(PIU)SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 10Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
Figure 5-3 provides access capacities of slots when PCXGB/PCXLG boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550.
Figure 5-3 Access capacities of slots when PCXLG/PCXGB boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLOT
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)SLO
T10
(PIU)
SLOT11
(FAN)SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
10Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8 SLOT
91
(PIU)SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 10Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
1Gbit/s 1Gbit/s
Figure 5-4 provides access capacities of slots when PCXGA boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Figure 5-4 Access capacities of slots when PCXGA boards are installed on the OptiX OSN 550
SLOT
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)SLO
T10
(PIU)
SLOT11
(FAN)SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
2.5Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8 SLOT
91
(PIU)SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 2.5Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
4Gbit/s 4Gbit/s
1Gbit/s 1Gbit/s
5.1.3 Cross-Connect and Slot Access Capacity (TDM) This section provides cross-connect capacities and slot access capacities of the OptiX OSN 550 in TDM mode.
Cross-Connect Capacities (TDM Mode) Table 5-3 lists cross-connect capacities when different system control, switching, and timing boards are installed.
Table 5-3 Cross-connect capacities of the OptiX OSN 550
Board Higher Order Cross-Connect Capacity (Gbit/s)
Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity (Gbit/s)
PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB/CXL
20 5
Access Capacities of Slots (TDM Mode) Access capacities of all slots are shown in Figure 5-5. The access capacity of a slot remains the same regardless of whether the CXL, PCXLX, PCXX, PCXLG, PCXGA, or PCXGB board is installed.
Figure 5-5 Access capacities of slots on the OptiX OSN 550
SLOT
9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)SLO
T10
(PIU)
SLOT11
(FAN)SLOT
92
(PIU)
SLOT 7
2.5Gbit/s
SLOT 5
SLOT 3
SLOT 2
SLOT 4
SLOT 6
SLOT 8 SLOT
91
(PIU)SLOT
93
(FAN)
SLOT 1 2.5Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
5.2 Outdoor Cabinet The equipment operating in a high-temperature and dust-concentrated outdoor environment needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 550 can be installed in APM30H outdoor cabinet, For the details of APM30H, see Outdoor Cabinet in Hardware Description.
5.3 Board Category This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. Different boards provide the equipment with different functions.
Table 5-4 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 5-4 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
System control, switching, and timing board (Hybrid)
TNM1PCXLX
The cross-connect, timing, system control, and line board supports: A packet
switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s
A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
One 10GE and one STM-N
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and 8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
ports System
communication and control
TNM1PCXX
The cross-connect, timing, system control, and line board supports: A packet
switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s
A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
One 10GE port
System communication and control
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 7 and 8
TNM1PCXLG
The cross-connect, timing, system control, and line board supports:
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be
Slots 7 and 8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
A packet switching capacity of 40 Gbit/s
A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
One GE and one STM-N ports
System communication and control
S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
TNM1PCXGA
The cross-connect, timing, system control, and line board supports: A packet
switching capacity of 20 Gbit/s
A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Slots 7 and 8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
One GE port
System communication and control
TNM1PCXGB
The cross-connect, timing, system control, and line board supports: A packet
switching capacity of 40 Gbit/s
A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
One GE port
System communication and control
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Slots 7 and 8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
System control, switching, and timing board (TDM)
TNM1CXL1
The cross-connect, timing, system control, and line board supports: A higher
order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
System communication and control
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One STM-1 SFP optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
Slots 7 and 8
TNM1CXL4
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One STM-4 SFP optical port of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 7 and 8
TNM1CXL16
One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port)
One STM-16 SFP optical port of the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2 type
Slots 7 and 8
Packet processing board
TNM1MD1
32xsmart E1 service processing board
75/120-ohm E1 port Slots 1 to 6
TNM1EM6T
6xRJ45 FE/GE processing board
Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X)
Two GE electrical ports (they can serve as FE electrical ports): 1000BASE-T
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1EM6F
4xRJ45 and 2xSFP FE/GE processing board
Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X)
Two GE/FE SFP optical/electrical ports: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/1000Base-T/100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 4xGE (SFP/RJ45)
Four GE electrical ports: Slots 3 to
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
EG4C processing board
1000BASE-T Four GE/FE SFP optical ports:
1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
6
TNM1EF8F
8xFE processing board
Eight FE SFP optical ports: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1EX1
1x10GE processing board
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Slots 1 and 2
TNM1CQ1
4-port channelized STM-1 service processing board
Four STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports of the S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical type or of SFP electrical modules
Slots 1 to 6
SDH board TNH2SL1D
2xSTM-1 interface board
Two STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2SL1Q
4xSTM-1 interface board
Four STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2SL4D
2xSTM-4 interface board
Two STM-4 SFP optical ports of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 1 to 6
PDH board TNH2SP3D
42xE1/T1 tributary board
Forty-two 75/120-ohm E1 ports or forty-two 100-ohm T1 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2PL3T
3xE3/T3 tributary board
Three 75-ohm E3/T3 ports Slots 1 to 6
EoS board TNH2E 8xFE Eight FE electrical ports: Slots 1 to
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 5 Hardware and Structure
Board Classification
Board Acronym
Board Name
Port Type Valid Slot
FS8 switching and processing board
10/100BASE-T(X) 6
TNH2EGT1
1xGE transparent transmission board
One GE SFP optical/electrical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/1000Base-T
Slots 1 to 6
WDM board
TNM1DMD2
2-port optical add/drop multiplexing board
wIN/wOUT wA1/wA2 wD1/wD2 eIN/eOUT eA1/eA2 eD1/eD2
slot 1 to 6
Auxiliary interface board
TNM1AUX
Auxiliary interface board
One orderwire phone port One asynchronous data port One synchronous data port 6-input/2-output alarm port One 2-channel external clock
port Two 2-channel external time
ports
Slots 1 to 6
Power supply board
UPM Uninterruptible power module
One 110 V/220 V AC power input port
Two -48 V DC power output ports
Slot 97
TND1PIU
Power supply board
One -48 V/-60 V DC power input port
Slots 91 and 92
TNF1APIU
Power supply board
Two 110 V/220 V AC power input ports
Slots 4 and 6 (recommended)
Slots 2 and 4
Fan board TNM1FAN
Fan board N/A Slot 93
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
6 Networking and Application Scenarios
About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 550 supports various service networking topologies in the time division multiplexing (TDM) and packet domains, applicable to a wide range of scenarios.
6.1 Basic Network Topologies
OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain.
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking
In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 can transport packet services and time division multiplexing (TDM) services at the same time.
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking
This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking.
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking
This section describes the typical application of time division multiplexing (TDM) networking.
6.1 Basic Network Topologies OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports separate and combined configurations of the following types: terminal multiplexer (TM), add/drop multiplexer (ADM), and multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM).
OptiX OSN 550s can form the following network topologies: chain, ring, tangent rings, and ring with chain. In addition, OptiX OSN 550s can be interconnected with other OptiX OSN equipment, OptiX DWDM equipment, and OptiX Metro equipment to provide a complete transport network solution. See Table 6-1.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Table 6-1 Network topologies supported by OptiX OSN 550s and corresponding legends
Network Topology
Legend
Chain
Ring
Tangent rings
Intersecting rings
Ring with chain
6.2 Typical Application of Hybrid Networking In Hybrid networking mode, the OptiX OSN 550 can transport packet services and time division multiplexing (TDM) services at the same time.
Figure 6-1 shows a Hybrid ring network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services 3G ATM base station services
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
3G IP base station services
Figure 6-1 Hybrid networking
OptiX OSN 550 BTSNodeB BSCRNCOptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
E1/T1
ATM/IMA E1
FE
E1/STM-1
ATM/IMA E1/GE
Packet ring
TDM ring
Signal flow
Networking Solution When numerous E1 services and Ethernet services coexist, the Hybrid networking solution mixing the SDH technology and PTN technology is used to meet multi-service transmission demands and improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.
E1 services are transmitted in pure TDM mode over the SDH network, which reduces the network buildout and maintenance cost.
FE services and GE services are transmitted in pure packet mode over the PTN network, which reduces the transmission cost per bit.
WDM colored optical ports and built-in optical add/drop multiplexers are used when optical fiber resources are over-consumed or inadequate.
Service Types 2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX
OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 (or PWE3) mode respectively. These services are then mapped to VC-12s and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the BSC.
3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode, and encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II that is connected to the RNC in end-to-end mode.
Table 6-2 lists the service types and their transmission modes.
Table 6-2 Service types and their transmission modes for a Hybrid network
UNI-side Device
Service Port Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology
2G base station TDM E1/T1 VC SDH VC P2P connection
3G ATM base ATM/IMA E1 VC SDH VC P2P
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
UNI-side Device
Service Port Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology
station connection
3G IP base station
FE PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-TP
VPWS, VPLS
A 3G base station and an RNC exchange services, base station management information, and
signaling. Base station management information and signaling due to their importance are preferentially processed in the transmission network. Therefore, base station management information and signaling are assigned a VLAN called the management VLAN, and services are assigned a VLAN called the service VLAN. The management VLAN has a higher priority than the service VLAN.
To prevent VLAN conflicts, VLANs must be planned by considering all base stations. Generally, the base stations managed by the same RNC are grouped into multiple switch areas. All base stations in the same switch area share one management VLAN and one service VLAN. Base stations in different switch areas have different management VLANs and service VLANs. See Figure 6-2.
On the same OptiX OSN 550, the management VLAN and service VLAN are mapped to different PWs, and the PWs are carried by the same tunnel to save label resources.
Figure 6-2 VLAN plan
Switch area 1:Management VLAN=68, Pri=6Service VLAN=78, Pri=4
Switch area 2:Management VLAN=88, Pri=6Service VLAN=98, Pri=4
Switch area 3:Management VLAN=1008, Pri=6Service VLAN=1118, Pri=4
RNC
Transmission network
NodeB NodeB NodeB
Protection The SDH network is protected by the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or MSP
mechanism.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
The PTN network is protected by the PW 1:1 APS or tunnel 1:1 APS mechanism. To
achieve dual-homing at the convergence layer, a 1:1 APS protection group with the same source but different sinks needs to be configured, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 PW/Tunnel 1:1 APS
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
Protection channel
Working channel
PW
Tunnel
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 PW APS
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 tunnel APS
OAM The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions for PTN networks, including ETH-OAM, MPLS OAM, and MPLS-TP OAM. Figure 6-4 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-4 Application of hierarchical OAM on a Hybrid network
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
Ethernet Service OAM Ethernet Port OAMEthernet Port OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM
ETH Layer
PW Layer
Tunnel Layer
MEP
MEP
MEP MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP MIP
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
For higher network bandwidth utilization, generally only CC/CV OAM is enabled for a tunnel. In addition, to limit tunnel APS protection switching within 50 ms, the detection packet transmission interval is set to 3.3 ms.
QoS As the service access node, an OptiX OSN 550 is generally connected to multiple base stations. Each base station has different priorities of management data and service data. The quality of service (QoS) function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-3 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 6-3 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a Hybrid network
Network Position
Point of Application QoS Function
Ingress node Ingress direction of the UNI port
VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR)
PW ingress CAR for PWs, the VLAN Pri field being mapped to the LSP EXP field
Egress direction of the NNI port
Weighted random early detection (WRED) congestion management, SP+WRR scheduling (SP is short for strict priority and weighted round robin for WRR.)
Transit node Ingress direction of the NNI port
Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields
Egress direction of the WRED congestion management, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling (WFQ is short for
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Network Position
Point of Application QoS Function
NNI port weighted fair queuing.)
Egress node Ingress direction of the NNI port
Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields
Egress direction of the UNI port
WRED, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling, the LSP EXP field being mapped to the VLAN Pri field
Ingress direction of the UNI port
VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and CAR
Synchronization The SDH clock or synchronous Ethernet clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
As shown in Figure 6-5, clock synchronization information from the two building integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II nodes on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source.
The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by means of the retiming E1 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-5 Clock synchronization on a Hybrid network
BITS Node B
Slave BITSPhysical synchronization route
Physical synchronization protection route
OptiX OSN 550 BTSOptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
ATM/IMA E1/FE/2M
external clock Master BITS
TDM E1
6.3 Typical Application of Pure Packet Networking This section describes the typical application of pure packet networking.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-6 shows a pure packet network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services 3G ATM base station services 3G IP base station services LTE base station services
Figure 6-6 Pure packet networking
OptiX OSN 550 BTSNodeB BSCRNCOptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
E1/T1
ATM/IMA E1
FE
E1/STM-1
ATM/IMA E1/GE
Packet ring
Signal flow
10GE
S-GW/MME
Networking Solution When a few E1 services and numerous Ethernet services coexist, the pure packet networking solution using the cost-effective PTN technology is used to meet multi-service transmission demands and improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.
E1 services are transmitted in TDM/ATM PWE3 mode over the PTN network since the TDM network is unavailable in the pure packet networking solution.
FE services and GE services are transmitted in pure packet mode over the PTN network, which reduces the transmission cost per bit.
Service Types 2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX
OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 mode respectively. These services are then encapsulated into PWE3 packets. Finally, the PWE3 packets are aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode, and encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
LTE base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in GE mode, and encapsulated into PWE3 packets. The PWE3 packets are then aggregated to the OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II in end-to-end mode.
Table 6-4 lists the service types and their transmission modes.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Table 6-4 Service types and their transmission modes for a pure PTN network
UNI-side Device
Service Port Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology
2G base station TDM E1/T1 PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-TP
End-to-end P2P connection
3G ATM base station
ATM/IMA E1 PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-TP
End-to-end P2P connection
3G IP base station
FE PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-TP
VPWS, VPLS
LTE base station
GE PWE3 MPLS/MPLS-TP
VPWS, VPLS
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
A 3G/LTE base station and an RNC/S-GW/MME exchange services, base station management information, and signaling. Base station management information and signaling due to their importance are preferentially processed in the transmission network. Therefore, base station management information and signaling are assigned a VLAN called the management VLAN, and services are assigned a VLAN called the service VLAN. The management VLAN has a higher priority than the service VLAN.
To prevent VLAN conflicts, VLANs must be planned by considering all base stations. Generally, the base stations managed by the same RNC/S-GW/MME are grouped into multiple switch areas. All base stations in the same switch area share one management VLAN and one service VLAN. Base stations in different switch areas have different management VLANs and service VLANs. See Figure 6-7.
On the same OptiX OSN 550, the management VLAN and service VLAN are mapped to different PWs, and the PWs are carried by the same tunnel to save label resources.
Figure 6-7 VLAN plan
Switch area 1:Management VLAN=68, Pri=6Service VLAN=78, Pri=4
Switch area 2:Management VLAN=88, Pri=6Service VLAN=98, Pri=4
Switch area 3:Management VLAN=1008, Pri=6Service VLAN=1118, Pri=4
NodeB/eNodeB NodeB/eNodeB NodeB/eNodeB
RNC/S-GW/MME
Transmission network
Protection The PTN network is protected by the PW 1:1 APS or tunnel 1:1 APS mechanism. To achieve dual-homing at the convergence layer, a 1:1 APS protection group with the same source but different sinks needs to be configured, as shown in Figure 6-8.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-8 PW/Tunnel 1:1 APS
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
Protection channel
Working channel
PW
Tunnel
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 PW APS
Co-sourced but not co-sinked 1:1 tunnel APS
OAM The OptiX OSN 550 supports the hierarchical OAM functions for PTN networks, including ETH-OAM, MPLS OAM, and MPLS-TP OAM. Figure 6-9 shows the application of hierarchical OAM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-9 Application of hierarchical OAM on a Hybrid network
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
Ethernet Service OAM Ethernet Port OAMEthernet Port OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
MPLS/MPLS-TP Tunnel OAM
ETH Layer
PW Layer
Tunnel Layer
MEP
MEP
MEP MEP
MEP
MEP
MIP MIP
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
For higher network bandwidth utilization, generally only CC/CV OAM is enabled for a tunnel. In addition, to limit tunnel APS protection switching within 50 ms, the detection packet transmission interval is set to 3.3 ms.
QoS As the service access node, an OptiX OSN 550 is generally connected to multiple base stations. Each base station has different priorities of management data and service data. The QoS function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-5 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 6-5 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a pure PTN network
Network Position
Point of Application QoS Function
Ingress node Ingress direction of the UNI port
VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR)
PW ingress CAR for PWs, the VLAN Pri field being mapped to the LSP EXP field
Egress direction of the NNI port
Weighted random early detection (WRED) congestion management, SP+WRR scheduling (SP is short for strict priority and weighted round robin for WRR.)
Transit node Ingress direction of the NNI port
Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields
Egress direction of the WRED congestion management, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling (WFQ is short for
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Network Position
Point of Application QoS Function
NNI port weighted fair queuing.)
Egress node Ingress direction of the NNI port
Services being transmitted to different priority queues based on their LSP EXP fields
Egress direction of the UNI port
WRED, SP+WRR or SP+WFQ scheduling, the LSP EXP field being mapped to the VLAN Pri field
Ingress direction of the UNI port
VUNI ingress policies: traffic classification and CAR
Synchronization The synchronous Ethernet clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
As shown in Figure 6-10, clock synchronization information from the two building integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II nodes on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source.
The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by means of the retiming E1 clock, synchronous Ethernet clock, or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-10 Clock synchronization on a pure PTN network
BITS Node B
Slave BITSPhysical synchronization route
Physical synchronization protection route
OptiX OSN 550 BTSOptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
ATM/IMA E1/FE/2M
external clock Master BITS
TDM E1
6.4 Typical Application of TDM Networking This section describes the typical application of time division multiplexing (TDM) networking.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Figure 6-11 shows a TDM network, on which the following base station services are transmitted:
2G base station services 3G ATM base station services 3G IP base station services
Figure 6-11 Pure TDM networking
OptiX OSN 550 BTSNodeB BSCRNCOptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
E1/T1
FE
E1/STM-1
GE
TDM ring
Signal flow
Networking Solution When numerous E1 services and a few Ethernet services coexist, the pure TDM networking solution using the sophisticated and cost-effective SDH technology is used to improve the price performance ratio of network buildout and maintenance.
E1 services are transmitted in pure TDM mode over the SDH network, which reduces the network buildout and maintenance cost.
FE services are transmitted in Ethernet over SDH (EoS) mode over the SDH network since the PTN network is unavailable in the pure TDM networking solution.
Service Types 2G base station services and 3G ATM base station services are transmitted to the OptiX
OSN 550 in TDM E1/T1 mode and ATM/IMA E1 mode respectively. These services are then mapped to VC-12s and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the BSC and RNC.
3G IP base station services are transmitted to the OptiX OSN 550 in FE mode. These services are then encapsulated into VC-12s in EoS mode and transmitted over the SDH network in end-to-end mode. Finally, these services are aggregated to the RNC.
Table 6-6 lists the service types and their transmission modes.
Table 6-6 Service types and their transmission modes for a pure TDM network
UNI-side Device
Service Port Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology
2G base station TDM E1/T1 VC SDH VC P2P
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
UNI-side Device
Service Port Encapsulation Mode
Transmission Technology
Service Topology connection
3G ATM base station
ATM/IMA E1 VC SDH VC P2P connection
3G IP base station
FE Ethernet over SDH
SDH EVPL, EVPLAN
Protection The SDH network is protected by the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP) or MSP mechanism.
OAM The OptiX OSN 550 supports Ethernet port OAM that complies with IEEE 802.3ah and Ethernet service OAM that complies with IEEE 802.1ag for Ethernet service fault analysis and locating. Figure 6-12 shows the application of ETH-OAM.
Figure 6-12 Application of ETH-OAM on a pure TDM network
CE1
CE2
PE1
CE4
CE3
P
P
P
P
P
PE2
OptiX OSN 550/500 OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
Ethernet Service OAM Ethernet Port OAMEthernet Port OAMETH Layer MEP MEP
QoS As the service access node, the OptiX OSN 550 may receive burst Ethernet traffic. The committed access rate (CAR) mechanism must be applied for incoming traffic. Incoming traffic must be scheduled before being transmitted to virtual concatenation (VC) channels, to ensure that higher-priority services are forwarded first. The QoS function is used for managing traffic of different services from different base stations. Table 6-7 lists the QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 6 Networking and Application Scenarios
Table 6-7 QoS functions for the OptiX OSN 550 on a pure TDM network
Network Position
Point of Application
QoS Function
Access node Ingress direction of the UNI port
Traffic classification, committed access rate (CAR), priority-based scheduling
Aggregation node Ingress direction of the UNI port
Traffic classification, CAR, priority-based scheduling
Synchronization The SDH clock is used for network-wide synchronization.
As shown in Figure 6-13, clock synchronization information from the two building integrated timing supplies (BITSs) is injected into the two OptiX OSN 3500/7500 II nodes on the aggregation ring. The master BITS provides a higher-priority clock source and the slave BITS provides a lower-priority clock source.
The base stations derive clock synchronization information from the OptiX OSN 550 by means of the retiming E1 clock or 2M external clock.
Figure 6-13 Clock synchronization on a pure TDM network
BITS Node B
Slave BITSPhysical synchronization route
Physical synchronization protection route
OptiX OSN 550 BTSOptiX OSN 3500/7500 II
ATM/IMA E1/2M external
clockMaster BITS
TDM E1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Network Management System
7 Network Management System
About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 550 is uniformly managed by the transmission network management system (NMS) and local craft terminal (LCT) through the ETH port. The OptiX OSN 550 supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The NMS maintains the OSN, SDH, Metro, and DWDM network elements (NEs) on an entire network. The NMS can implement end-to-end configurations for TDM and packet services.
The OptiX OSN 550 complies with ITU-T Recommendations. The equipment adopts a management information model and an object-oriented management technology. With the NMS, the equipment can exchange information with the NE software through the communication module to manage alarms and performance events in a centralized manner. In addition, end-to-end configuration on the management plane can be achieved.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports SNMPv2/SNMPv3, which allows a third-party NMS to monitor equipment performance.
7.1 Network Management
This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication management, and intra-NE communication management.
7.2 DCN Management
Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN) is a network management data communication channel, with which users can remotely manage and maintain NEs.
7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs
With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the U2000 server time. In this way, the U2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
7.1 Network Management This chapter describes the network management system, inter-NE communication management, and intra-NE communication management.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Network Management System
Figure 7-1 shows network management.
Figure 7-1 Network management
Figure 7-1 illustrates a network that has Huawei equipment deployed at different layers: NEs at sites A-D are OptiX OSN 8800 NEs, NEs at site E are OptiX OSN 1800 NEs, and NEs at site F are OptiX OSN 550/500 NEs.
In Figure 7-1,
Network management system: U2000 and U2000 LCT Inter-NE communication management:
− The NEs at sites A and C are gateway NEs (GNEs) and are connected to the external DCN through a switch or router. All the other NEs are non-GNEs that communicate with the NMS through GNEs.
− The NEs between sites A and D are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over ESC/OSC channels.
− The NEs between sites E and C are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over ESC channels.
− The NEs between sites F and C are connected with fibers and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over inband channels.
− Some NEs between sites A and F (NEs connected to an optical or electrical transmission device, such as NEs at site B) are connected with network cables, and use the HWECC or IP over DCC protocol to exchange information over Ethernet channels (at NM_ETH ports).
Intra-NE communication management: The master and slave subracks implement intra-NE communication for each NE at sites A-D. One NE at site A has three subracks (one master is connected to two slaves).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Network Management System
Network management involves the following aspects:
Network Management System The network management system (NMS) provides unified management for OptiX equipment. In compliance with associated ITU-T Recommendations, the NMS uses a standard information management model and object-oriented management technology.
The NMS manages alarms, performance, configurations, communication, security, and topologies of the entire optical transmission system. The NMS also gives users end-to-end management capabilities. An NMS helps to improve network quality, lower maintenance costs, and ensure efficient utilization of network resources.
The NMS includes two sets of network management software: iManager U2000 (U2000) and iManager U2000 LCT (U2000 LCT). The U2000 is usually installed at a network management center, and most equipment is managed remotely. The LCT provides the ability to configure and maintain individual NEs. The LCT is usually installed on a PC for local access to equipment.
Inter-NE Communication Management Inter-NE communication management is implemented based on data communication networks (DCNs). A DCN consists of NMSs, GNEs, non-GNEs, and the connections between them. Both NMSs and NEs are nodes of a DCN. The DCN between the NMSs and NEs is called the external DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called the internal DCN.
An external DCN is a local area network (LAN) or a wide area network (WAN) and uses the TCP/IP protocol for communication. It provides communication between NMSs and between the NMS server and GNEs.
An internal DCN uses the HWECC or TCP/IP protocol to provide communication between NEs. NEs support inband DCN and outband DCN. The outband DCN uses DCC overhead bytes as physical DCN channels. The inband DCN uses Ethernet service channels as physical DCN channels.
7.2 DCN Management Reliable network management ensures proper running of a network, and therefore transmission of network management data becomes very critical. The data communication network (DCN) is a network management data communication channel, with which users can remotely manage and maintain NEs.
Table 7-1 lists the DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 7-1 DCN solutions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Item Inband DCN Outband DCN
Purpose and benefit NM information is transmitted through the service channels provided by managed equipment. Therefore, no extra equipment or DCN is required. This reduces
NM information is transmitted on non-service channels.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Network Management System
Item Inband DCN Outband DCN operating expenditure.
Feature Flexible networking: NM information is encapsulated into Ethernet frames and carries a fixed VLAN ID to get separated from the service data. The NM information is transmitted with services on service channels.
Configurable VLAN priorities for inband DCN packets
High reliability: Outband DCN uses dedicated maintenance channels. Therefore, an NMC can construct a DCN network with managed equipment in various ways, such as E1 private lines and Ethernet; in addition, you can obtain NM information in time even when faults occur on service channels.
Networking technology HWECC IP
HWECC IP OSI
Application scenario Packet network TDM network
Resource allocation mode N/A Channel types: D1-D3 and D4-D12
Running mode: Mode 1: 32 channels
using D1-D3 bytes Mode 2: 12 channels
using D1-D3 bytes or 6 channels using D4-D12 bytes
7.3 Synchronization Between the NMS and NEs With the time synchronization function, consistency is maintained between the NE time and the U2000 server time. In this way, the U2000 is able to record the correct time at which alarms occur and the correct time at which the abnormal events are reported by NEs.
When NEs report alarms and abnormal events to the U2000, the time at which such alarms and events occur is based on the NE time. If the NE time is incorrect, then the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of alarms is recorded in the U2000. This may cause trouble in fault location. In addition, the wrong time with regard to the occurrence of abnormal events is recorded in the NE security logs. To ensure the NE time accuracy, the U2000 provides three time synchronization schemes: synchronizing with the U2000 server, synchronizing with the NTP server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server and synchronizing with the standard NTP server.
If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the U2000 server, all NEs use the U2000 server time as the standard time. The NE time can be synchronized with the U2000
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Network Management System
server time manually or automatically. The U2000 server time refers to the system time of the workstation or computer where the U2000 server is located. This scheme features easy operation, and is applicable in networks that require a low accuracy with regard to time.
If you use the scheme of synchronizing with the NTP server or synchronizing with the standard NTP server, the NE time and the U2000 time are synchronized with the NTP server time or the standard NTP server time automatically. The NTP server can be the U2000 server or a special time server. This scheme enables the U2000 and NEs to have a time accuracy of one nanosecond in theory, and applies to a network with high requirement for time accuracy.
NTP Network Application Figure 7-2 shows a network in which NTP is used to ensure synchronization across the network.
Figure 7-2 Network using NTP to ensure synchronization
Time server
NMS server
NE1
NE5 NE4
NE3
NE2
The highest-level time server
Clients
The middle-level time server
As shown in Figure 7-2, the equipment in the network can be classified into three categories:
The highest-level time server: the 0-level time server The middle-level time server: the 1- or 2-level time server that obtains time information
from the higher-level time server and provides time information for the lower-level time server
Clients: obtaining time information only
In application, the server and clients can be configured as follows:
Choose the NMS server as the time server for NEs. The NMS server can be set as the highest-level time server, or set to obtain time information from other time servers.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 7 Network Management System
NEs can only be set as the client, obtaining time information from the specified time
server.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
8 Operation and Maintenance
About This Chapter Routine equipment maintenance and troubleshooting are essential to ensure that a network runs properly. The OptiX OSN 550 provides strong maintenance capabilities.
Table 8-1 lists the maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 8-1 Maintenance functions that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Application Scenario
Function Description
Routine maintenance
Alarm and performance management
Provides audible and visual alarms warn of emergencies to help network administrators take prompt action.
Provides running status indicators and alarm indicators on all boards to help administrators locate and handle faults quickly.
Provides the alarm input and output function to facilitate alarm collection for external devices.
Dynamically monitors the operation and alarm status of all NEs using the NMS.
Detects alarms and performance of a standby system control board.
Stores results of sixteen consecutive 15-minute performance monitoring events, that is, four hours of performance events divided into 15-minute segments.
Stores results of six consecutive 24-hour performance monitoring events, that is, six days of performance events divided into 24-hour segments.
RMON Monitors data from different network segments on a transmission network. RMON supplements simple Ethernet performance management tools, and can be used on a wide range of networks.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Application Scenario
Function Description
Upgrade and loading of board software and NE software
Supports in-service upgrades and loading of board software and NE software.
Supports remote loading of board software and field programmable gate array (FPGA).
Supports error-proof loading and resumable loading.
Voltage check Measures input voltages and detects undervoltage and overvoltage states.
Automatic search for optical fibers
Supports the fiber auto-discovery function on the NMS.
Automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
SDH single-mode optical ports support the ALS function.
Packet Ethernet boards support the setting of upper threshold or lower threshold of input optical power.
Port impedance query
Supports the query of port impedance on the NMS.
Optical module information query
Allows the NMS to query information about optical modules, including single-mode/multi-mode, rate level, supplier, production date, and wavelength.
Outdoor cabinet monitoring
Monitors outdoor cabinets by means of the monitoring ports on AUX boards.
Power consumption control
Computes system power consumption. Monitors the total power consumption of an NE, and
reports an alarm if the total power consumption exceeds the power consumption threshold of the NE.
Supports the query of the power consumption of an NE/board by using the NMS.
Storage of the ID and IP address of an NE
The backplane stores IDs and IP addresses of NEs, and the active SCC board reads these from the backplane.
Port information query
Queries communication protocols in use, status, functions, and names of ports used for external communication and physical ports connected to networks.
OAM ETH OAM Uses outband packets to detect and monitor the connectivity and performance of service trails. The process does not affect services.
ATM OAM Detects and locates ATM faults, and monitors ATM performance.
MPLS OAM Detects and locates faults on an MPLS network, and works with MPLS APS to protect services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Application Scenario
Function Description
MPLS OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer.
MPLS-TP OAM MPLS-TP OAM can detect, identify, and locate faults on packet switched networks, and notify NEs of the faults, so the NEs can implement protection switching.
MPLS-TP OAM mechanisms include tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer.
Fault locating
One-click data collection
Provides a one-click data collection function for fault data to reduce data collection time before service recovery.
Users can collect fault data selectively and can stop a collection process manually.
Loopback Service boards support inloops and outloops on ports to facilitate fault location.
Remote maintenance
Maintenance personnel can use a public telephone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 550 equipment.
PRBS An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used as an instrument to transmit and receive unframed services in order to analyze whether service paths are faulty.
An NE enabled with the PRBS function can be used to analyze itself or the entire network.
The PRBS function substitutes for a test instrument during deployment or fault location.
Warm/Cold resets System control, switching, and timing boards and service boards support warm and cold resets. Warm resets do not affect services.
Hot swap Service boards, system control, switching, and timing boards, power supply boards, and fan boards support hot swapping.
Pluggable optical modules can be hot-swapped. Service cables and auxiliary cables can be
hot-swapped.
Port mirroring Supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services.
Quick fault rectification
A traditional NE database backup may end up with a failure. The quick fault rectification function uses NMS configuration data as the data restoration source to rebuild
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Application Scenario
Function Description
the NE configuration database.
Other Hot patch loading Supports the hot patch loading function. Running software can be upgraded without being interrupted.
Alarm reporting upon removal of important peripheral storage devices
When a CF storage card is removed, the equipment reports a security alarm.
NSF NSF stands for Non-interrupted Service Forwarding. When the control plane of the equipment is faulty, the NSF function ensures that the data services are not interrupted, ensuring transmission of the key services on the network.
8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features including MPLS OAM, ETH-OAM, ATM OAM, and RMON in the packet domain.
8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM)
This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the TDM domain.
8.3 Upgrade Methods
If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading and package diffusion.
8.1 Maintenance Support (Packet) This section describes the maintenance functions and features including MPLS OAM, ETH-OAM, ATM OAM, and RMON in the packet domain.
8.1.1 TP-Assist The TP-Assist is an end-to-end service configuration, one-click commissioning, and one-click fault locating tool. It boosts the operation and maintenance (O&M) efficiency for PTN networks.
The OptiX OSN equipment provides TP-Assist functionality to simplify operation and improve efficiency in service configuration, installation, commissioning, fault diagnosis, and routine maintenance. Table 8-2 describes the TP-Assist OAM system applied to PSNs.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Table 8-2 TP-Assist O&M system applied to PSNs
Function Sub-Item Application
End-to-end service configuration
End-to-end configuration of packet services
Supports end-to-end configuration of E-Line (VPWS), E-LAN (VPLS), VPWS+VPLS, native E-Line, and native E-LAN services.
Alarm deployment along with service configuration
Automatically configures and starts service continuity checks (CCs), tunnel OAM CCs, and PW OAM CCs immediately after services are configured in end-to-end mode.
One-click commissioning
One-click service connectivity test
Supports the following end-to-end, one-click OAM connectivity tests: ETH-OAM LB, tunnel ping, and PW ping.
One-click service performance test
Supports the following one-click OAM performance management items of Ethernet services, tunnels, and PWs: packet loss, delay, and delay jitter.
One-click fault diagnosis
Layer 3 IP ping Supports Layer 3 IP ping responses on a per-NE basis or in end-to-end mode at UNI ports on transport networks.
Service loopbacks Loops back Layer 2 E-LAN services at specific points and tests whether services are blocked.
One-click, intelligent fault diagnosis
Diagnoses service interruptions and service performance deterioration.
Performance measurement and monitoring
Supports the following performance measurement functions: Volume measurement: measures traffic
volumes by port, flow, V-UNI, PW, ingress tunnel, or queue, and displays volumes in graphical form on the NMS to illustrate bandwidth usage.
Measurement of congestion-caused packet loss: measures congestion-caused lost packets by flow, PW, or egress queue. This function helps learn the actual operating status of an NE and diagnose packet loss.
Supports the following performance monitoring functions: Threshold-crossing monitoring: volume
threshold crossing alarms Flow monitoring: no-traffic alarms Packet loss monitoring: packet loss
threshold crossing alarms
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Function Sub-Item Application
Half-duplex alarm for ETH ports
Reports a warning alarm if the working mode of an ETH port is set to auto-negotiation but the ETH port works in half-duplex mode.
8.1.2 MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM mechanism supported by the equipment includes tunnel OAM and PW OAM. Tunnel OAM operates at the tunnel layer, and PW OAM operates at the PW layer. Tunnel OAM and PW OAM both provide the complete fault detection and locating mechanism.
Tunnel OAM Description
The tunnel OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the tunnel layer of an MPLS network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved.
Objectives and benefits As a key bearer technology for the scalable next generation network (NGN), MPLS provides multi-service capabilities with ensured QoS. In addition, MPLS introduces a unique network layer (tunnel), which may cause some faults. Therefore, an MPLS network must have the OAM capability. By providing a tunnel OAM mechanism independent of any upper layer or lower layer, the tunnel OAM supports the following features:
− Provides query-on-demand and consecutive detections so that at any moment you can learn whether the monitored tunnel has defects.
− Detects, analyzes, and locates any defect that occurs, and notifies the NMS of the relevant information. − Triggers a protection switching immediately after a defect or fault occurs on a link. − Monitors the performance events indicating packet loss ratio, delay, and jitter in real time and reports them
to the NMS.
PW OAM Description
The PW OAM mechanism helps to effectively detect, identify, and locate internal defects at the PW layer of a network. The equipment triggers the protection switching based on the OAM detection status. Therefore, quick fault detection and service protection can be achieved.
Objectives and benefits The equipment performs PW encapsulation on service packets, and then transmits the service packets over tunnels. The network consists of two layers: tunnel and PW. Tunnels use tunnel OAM for maintenance and management, and PWs use PW OAM for maintenance and management. Currently, the equipment can detect the connectivity of a certain PW through ping packets, and then reports the result to the NMS.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
8.1.3 MPLS-TP OAM MPLS-TP OAM is defined by MPLS-TP. It is compatible with existing MPLS OAM standards and focuses on particularity of transport networks.
MPLS-TP OAM is available in two technical solutions: solution based on bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) extension and solution based on ITU-T G.8113.1. This section describes the solution based on ITU-T G.8113.1 extension.
ITU-T G.8113.1-compliant MPLS-TP OAM applies to most data communication equipment and packet switching equipment, and therefore can provide end-to-end OAM for PSNs consisting of data communication equipment and packet switching equipment.
Figure 8-2 Application of MPLS-TP OAM on a PSN consisting of data communication equipment and packet switching equipment
RNC
RNC
PSN
NodeB
NodeB
Packet switching equipment
MPLS-TP OAM
CX equipment
PW2
MPLS tunnel
PW1MPLS tunnel
Equipment with MPLS-TP OAM functionality can meet carrier-class data transmission needs.
8.1.4 ETH-OAM ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Definition
Based on the MAC layer, the ETH-OAM protocol performs OAM operations for the Ethernet by transmitting OAM packets. This protocol is irrelevant to the transmission medium. The OAM packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact on the other layers of the Ethernet. In addition, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH-OAM protocol occupies low bandwidths. Therefore, this protocol does not affect services carried on links.
ITU-T and IEEE have researches on ETH-OAM. Currently, Huawei Ethernet service processing boards have realized the ETH-OAM function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Wherein, IEEE 802.1ag define Ethernet service OAM standards, and IEEE 802.3ah defines Ethernet port OAM standards. As shown in Figure 8-2, the combination of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah provides a complete Ethernet OAM solution.
Figure 8-3 Application of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah
Core layer
PE1
CE4
PE2 CE3
P
P P
P
CE1
Router 3
Access layerAccess layer
Custom layerCustom layer
Router 1
Router 2
IEEE 802.1ag IEEE802.3ah
IEEE802.3ah
CE2
OptiX NE
Ethernet service OAM focuses on the maintenance of end-to-end Ethernet links. Based on services, Ethernet service OAM implements end-to-end detection in the unit of "maintenance domain" and performs segmental management on each network segment that is involved in the same service on a network.
Ethernet port OAM focuses on the maintenance of point-to-point Ethernet link between two directly-connected devices in Ethernet in the first mile (EFM). Ethernet port OAM does not focus on a specific service. It maintains the point-to-point Ethernet link by performing OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault check, remote loopback, and selfloop check.
Purpose With the continuous development of the Ethernet, especially when LANs evolve to WANs, operators pay more attention to equipment maintainability. Solutions to operations, administration and maintenance (OAM) in the transmission network are required urgently. Therefore, ETH-OAM is developed.
A comparison of ETH-OAM and existing OAM and fault locating methods is provided as follows:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
When a loopback is performed at a port, all packets on the port are looped back.
Therefore, the loopback method cannot be used if only a specific service needs to be looped back.
ETH-OAM can detect hardware faults. ETH-OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
8.1.5 ATM OAM This section provides the definition of ATM OAM and describes its purpose.
Definition ATM OAM is used for detecting and locating ATM faults, and monitoring ATM performance. In this document, ATM OAM refers to OAM only at the ATM layer and implements various OAM functions by means of specific ATM OAM cells.
Purpose ATM OAM provides segment-based ATM OAM between the CE and the PE and end-to-end-based ATM OAM between CEs.
As shown in Figure 8-3, ATM OAM cells are transmitted and detected between the CE and the PE, or between the CEs to monitor the ATM link.
Figure 8-4 Typical application of ATM OAM
PE1 PE2
Packet transmissionequipment
CE2CE1(NodeB) (RNC)
Segment check
End-to-end check
Segment check
ATM cell stream (VP level or VC level)
8.1.6 RMON By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Currently, the management of the Ethernet performance for transmission products is relevantly simple. In the case of the management of Ethernet ports, the management of the performance data of the ports is required. What's more, as the network is becoming complex, a method for managing network sections is required. Thus, the RMON emerges and the RMON should have the following features:
All statistics data is saved at the agent and the out-of-service operation on the manager is supported.
History data is saved for the fault diagnosis. Errors are detected and reported. Detailed data is provided. Multiple management stations are supported.
Based on the preceding purposes, the RMON defines a serial of statistic formats and functions to realize the data exchange between the control stations and detection stations that complies with the RMON standards. To meet the requirements of different networks, the RMON provides flexible detection modes and control mechanism. What's more, the RMON provides error diagnosis, planning and information receiving of the performance events of the entire network.
8.1.7 PRBS Boards with E1 ports provide the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) functional module, which is used for network self-test and maintenance. You can determine whether the working channel on the UNI/NNI side is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test.
The PRBS functional module is equivalent to a simple instrument that transmits and receives unframed services.
Bit errors detected by the PRBS functional module help diagnose the faults on service paths and locate the faults on fibers or boards. By using the PRBS function, you can analyze the local NE and the entire network. Therefore, you can perform a test without a real instrument during the deployment or fault locating.
8.1.8 CES Alarm Transmission The OptiX OSN 550 uses the L/M and R fields in the control word to transparently transmit alarms.
CES alarm transparent transmission involves transmitting local CES alarms to the remote end, and inserting corresponding alarms to notify the remote end of faults in the local end. Depending on the position where the alarm is generated, CES alarm transparent transmission can be between AC sides, and from the NNI side to the AC side.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission Between AC Sides There are two scenarios where CES alarms are transparently transmitted between AC sides.
The fault information on the AC link or port is transmitted through the PSN as follows:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Figure 8-5 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (1)
If PE1 detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC1 side, PE1 returns RDI to upstream and informs PE2 of the fault through the L field of control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE2 reports the CESPW_OPPOSITE_ACFAULT alarm and inserts AIS to the AC2 side.
The service alarms on the AC side are transparently transmitted through the PSN as follows:
Figure 8-6 CES alarm transparent transmission between AC sides (2)
If the RNC detects a link fault or an E1 port fault on the AC2 side, the RNC returns RDI to PE2; PE2 reports the RAI alarm and informs PE1 of the fault through the L/M field of control word. Upon receiving the control word, PE1 reports the RAI alarm and returns RDI to AC1.
The SAToP encapsulation mode does not support the M field, and therefore cannot transparently transmit the RAI alarm.
CES Alarm Transparent Transmission from the NNI Side to the AC Side Figure 8-6 shows the CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Figure 8-7 CES alarm transparent transmission from the NNI side to the AC side
When detecting that packet loss ratio continuously beyond the preset threshold, PE2 inserts the AIS alarm into AC2, and uses the R field in the control word to transmit the information to PE1. Then, PE1 reports the RAI alarm based on the R field.
8.1.9 Port Mirroring For the existing complex networks, OptiX OSN equipment has already provided various effective fault diagnosis methods. However, the methods require path overheads or even interrupt service. Therefore, a fast fault diagnosis method that does not affect services is urgently required. Port mirroring effectively addresses this requirement.
Port mirroring has the following features:
Port mirroring applies to online fault diagnosis. It replicates the traffic at one port to another port, and then an analyzer is used to locate faults.
After port mirroring is used, traffic can be monitored in real time using an analyzer.
As shown in Figure 8-7, a port on NE1 is the mirror source port and another port on NE1 is the mirror destination port. NE1 replicates the traffic at the mirror source port to the mirror destination port. An analyzer is used to analyze the traffic or to monitor the traffic in real time without affecting the services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Figure 8-8 Typical networking for port mirroring
RNC
NodeB
NE2
Normal Service
Mirror Service
NE3
Analyst
NE1(Monitored/Monitor)
Mirror Source Function Point
Mirror Observation Point
8.2 Maintenance Support (TDM) This section describes the maintenance functions and features in the TDM domain.
8.2.1 PRBS Certain boards provide the PRBS functional module, which is used for testing and maintaining the network. You can determine whether the working path on a tributary port, in the line direction, or in the cross-connect direction is normal, depending on whether bit errors are detected in a PRBS test.
For details, see PRBS.
8.2.2 ETH-OAM ETH-OAM enhances Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance functions and it strongly supports service continuity verification, service deployment commissioning, and network fault locating.
For details, see ETH-OAM.
8.2.3 RMON By using the remote monitoring (RMON), you can transmit network monitoring data between different network sections.
For details, see RMON.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
8.2.4 Data Test Frame The test frame is a data packet that is used to test the connectivity status of the network on the SDH side that transmits Ethernet services. The test frame is mainly used for commissioning Ethernet services or locating Ethernet service faults.
Configuring test frames does not affect services.
The test frame function complies with the Huawei internal standard, and can be transmitted and received only between VCTRUNK ports.
8.3 Upgrade Methods If the current version of the OptiX OSN 550 cannot meet customer requirements, upgrade the equipment to a higher version. The available upgrade methods are package loading and package diffusion.
Table 8-3 lists the upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 8-3 Upgrade methods available for the OptiX OSN 550
Upgrade Method Package Loading Package Diffusion
Definition With a software package description file, a software package functions as a logical package of required software. This logical package can be uploaded to upgrade an entire NE.
With a software package description file, a software package functions as a logical package of required software. The logical package is diffused and almost synchronously loaded to all NEs on a network. This upgrade method is more efficient.
Application scenario One NE needs to be upgraded.
System control boards and other boards must support package loading.
There are CF cards on system control boards.
More than one NE needs to be upgraded.
System control boards and other boards must support package loading.
There are CF cards on system control boards.
Characteristic All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI.
There is no need to care about which boards to upgrade or which files to update.
All the boards on an NE can be upgraded on a unified GUI.
There is no need to care about which boards to upgrade or which files to update.
Software packages are diffused.
Network load and network bandwidth are
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 8 Operation and Maintenance
Upgrade Method Package Loading Package Diffusion both shared.
Applicable version V100R003C00 and later versions support this upgrade method.
V100R003C00 and later versions support this upgrade method.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Security Management
9 Security Management
About This Chapter The OptiX OSN 550 allows NE security management to be implemented by various means.
9.1 Authentication Management
For security concerns, only an authenticated user can log in to an NE.
9.2 Authorization Management
Authorization management allows different authorities for different users when they operate an NE. This effectively protects an NE against inappropriate operations.
9.3 Network Security Management
The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in networks, is the precondition for the NMS to manage the NEs.
9.4 System Security Management
The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.
9.5 Log Management
The OptiX OSN 550 supports system security log management and Syslog management.
9.1 Authentication Management For security concerns, only an authenticated user can log in to an NE.
NE login management: You can successfully log in to an NE only after entering the correct user name and password.
NE user switching: One client allows only one user to operate an NE at a time. For this reason, if multiple NE users log in to an NE, the NE users need to be switched to ensure that the configuration data is unique.
Forcibly logging other users out of an NE: To avoid errors owing to simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to an NE, one user can forcibly log a lower-level user out from the NE.
NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to an NE.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Security Management
NE configuration locking: You can lock the function of configuring certain function
modules on an NE to prevent other users from configuring the modules. You can query users that have logged in to an NE.
9.2 Authorization Management Authorization management allows different authorities for different users when they operate an NE. This effectively protects an NE against inappropriate operations.
Management of NE users − Five user authority levels are available in an ascending order: monitoring level, operation level,
maintenance level, system level, and debugging level. − Based on network management systems, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE users, CMD
NE users, and general NE users. − You can create a user, assign an authority level for the user, and specify the user flag. − You can change a user name, a password, an authority level, and a user flag. − You can delete a user.
Management of NE user groups: − By default, five user groups are available with authorities in an ascending order: monitor group, operator
group, maintenance personnel group, administrator group, and super administrator group. − You can change the group to which a user belongs.
9.3 Network Security Management The security of transmitting data between the NMS and NEs, and in networks, is the precondition for the NMS to manage the NEs.
Communication between the NMS and NEs can be implemented based on the Access Control List (ACL), Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), or Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) protocol.
ACL Protocol ACL rules are configured to filter received IP packets. This controls the data traffic on networks and protects against malicious attacks.
You can set basic ACL rules or advanced ACL rules, based on the required system security level.
For an NE that requires a low security level, you can configure basic ACL rules so that the NE checks only the source addresses of received IP packets.
For an NE that requires a high security level, you can configure advanced ACL rules. In this case, the NE checks the source addresses, sink addresses, source ports, sink ports, and protocol types of received IP packets.
If both basic and advanced ACL rules are configured, an NE uses only advanced ACL rules to check received IP packets.
In addition, ACL rules support the following operations:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Security Management
Queries of ACL rules Modification of ACL rules Deletion of ACL rules
SSL Protocol The SSL protocol is used to protect the integrity and security of data.
RADIUS Protocol RADIUS provides a complete network security solution. After a RADIUS server verifies that the user name and password of a user are valid, the server allows a certain authority for the user, and provides services to the user.
Carriers' RADIUS servers manage all the user accounts and user attributes of the 550. To log in to an OptiX OSN 550 NE, you must apply for a user account to the carrier. When you attempt to log in to an OptiX OSN 550 NE, the RADIUS server verifies the user name and password that you have entered. If the verification fails, a login error is reported.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the shielding function when being connected to a network port management device. That is, when being connected to a network port on an OptiX OSN 550 NE, a network port management device manages only the connected OptiX OSN 550 NE, and cannot access the other devices that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 NE through ECCs. With this function, even if an OptiX OSN 550 NE in the insecure domain is accessed illegally, the NEs that are connected to the OptiX OSN 550 NE will not be illegally operated.
Security FTP Security File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) works at the secure shell (SSH) connection layer, and extends support for FTP security based on SSH-provided fundamental services like encryption and authentication.
In security, FTP transmits plain text and supports only password authentication, whereas SFTP transmits cipher text and supports both password authentication and cipher key authentication. Authentication by cipher key is safer than authentication by password.
SFTP needs to perform encryption and decryption and theoretically has a lower transmission efficiency than FTP. However, benefiting from specialized improvement design, SFTP generally has a higher transmission efficiency than FTP.
SFTP can load packages, upload/download databases, upload log files, and upload/download a single file. NEs can work only as SFTP clients and cannot work as SFTP servers. In addition, SFTP works based on TCP connections and requires IP routes between NEs and SSH servers. Therefore, SFTP service can be deployed only at gateway NEs.
9.4 System Security Management The system provides necessary security policies that are executed forcibly.
Account management: You can create/modify/delete/query accounts. Uniqueness and complexity of accounts: All accounts held in an NE are unique. An
account consists of 4 to 16 characters.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Security Management
Length and complexity of passwords: A password consists of 8 to 16 characters and
contains all the following types of characters: lowercase character, uppercase character, digit, and special character. A password cannot be any of the five recently used passwords, the user name, or reversed user name.
Active periods of passwords: Each password has an active period. After the active period of a password expires, the password can be used for only three logins. For a common user's password, the shortest active period is one day. A common user can change the password only after the shortest active period expires.
Storage of encrypted passwords: Encrypted by using the message digest algorithm 5 (MD5), passwords are held in a system.
Querying about online users: An administrator account can query online users.
9.5 Log Management The OptiX OSN 550 supports system security log management and Syslog management.
System Security Log Management The system security log of an NE records all operations and operation results on the NE. By querying the system security log, an administrator can trace and check operations of users.
You can query the system security log of an NE. You can forward the system security log to the Syslog server.
Syslog Management The Syslog service is used for the security management of NEs. Different information is transmitted to the Syslog server in a format compliant with the Syslog protocol so that maintenance personnel can monitor NEs easily.
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following functions related to the Syslog protocol:
Enabling and disabling the Syslog protocol Setting the transmission mode of the Syslog protocol to UDP (by default) or TCP Adding or deleting Syslog servers Configuration of multiple Syslog servers and transmission of logs to multiple servers at
the same time Reporting relevant alarms when the Syslog server fails to communicate with NEs
Figure 9-1 illustrates log transmission on a network by means of the Syslog protocol. To ensure the security of system logs, at least two Syslog servers are required on a transmission network. NEs communicate with Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. NEs communicate with each other in many modes, such as ECC and IP over DCC.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 9 Security Management
Figure 9-1 Log transmission by means of the Syslog protocol
NMS
Syslog server A
Syslog server BReal-timesecurity log
TCP/IP
NE A(client)
NE B
NE C(client)
NE D
ECC/IP over DCC
A Syslog server is a workstation or server that stores the system logs of all NEs on a network. Forwarding gateway NEs receive system logs from other NEs, and then forward these system logs to Syslog servers, for example, NE A and NE C in Figure 9-1.
When NEs communicate in IP mode, each NE can directly communicate with two different Syslog servers by running the IP protocol. Therefore, you need to configure the IP addresses and port numbers of the Syslog servers on an NE. The NE transmits the system log to two Syslog servers by using the automatic routing function of the IP protocol. You do not need to configure any forwarding gateway NE.
When NEs communicate in ECC mode, the NEs that are not directly connected to Syslog servers cannot communicate with Syslog servers. The logs of these NEs need to be transmitted to the gateway NEs that can communicate with Syslog servers directly. Then, the gateway NEs forward the logs to Syslog servers. Therefore, you need to configure forwarding gateway NEs. For example, you can configure NE A as the forwarding NE of NE D.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
10 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter This chapter describes general specifications, packet performance indicators, TDM performance indicators, port specifications, optical module specifications, indicator status explanation, and environment indicators of the equipment.
10.1 General Specifications
This section lists the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability.
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators
This section lists the equipment's packet performance indicators.
10.3 TDM Performance Indicators
This section lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators.
10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board
This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the equipment supports.
10.5 Optical Port Specifications
This section lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports and GE optical ports.
10.6 Colored Optical Ports
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment.
10.7 Electrical Port Specifications
This section lists the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical ports.
10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications
This section lists the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports, asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, and external clock ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation
This section provides status explanation for indicators on boards.
10.10 Safety Certification
The OptiX OSN 550 has passed many safety certifications.
10.11 Environmental Specifications
The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environments for storage, transportation, and operation.
10.1 General Specifications This section lists the chassis dimensions, weight, power consumption, heat consumption, power supply performance, electromagnetic compatibility, and reliability.
Table 10-1 lists the general specifications of the OptiX OSN 550.
Table 10-1 General specifications of the OptiX OSN 550
Item Description
Dimensions 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D)
Weight 3.5 kg (net weight of a chassis that contains one fan board and two PIU boards)
Power consumption
Maximum power consumption: 240 W Typical power consumption: 149 W
Board configuration for typical power consumption: 2 x PCXLX + 3 x EM6F + 1 x MD1 + 1 x FAN + 2 x PIU.
SLOT9
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH)
SLOT 1 (EXT )
SLOT 5 (EXT)
SLOT 3 (EXT)
SLOT 2 (EXT )
SLOT 4 (EXT)
SLOT 6 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH)SLOT10
(PIU) SLOT11
(FAN)SLOT92
(PIU)
SLOT 7 (PCXLX)
SLOT 1 (EM6F)
SLOT 3 (MD1)
SLOT 2 (EF6F)
SLOT 4 (EM6F)
SLOT91
(PIU) SLOT93
(FAN)
SLOT 8 (PCXLX)
Heat consumption
Maximum heat consumption: 819 BTU/h Typical heat consumption: 485 BTU/h
Power supply performance
DC power supply − Rated voltage: -48 V or -60 V − Voltage range: -38.4 V to -72 V
AC power supply − Rated voltage: 110 V or 220 V − Voltage range: 100 V to 240 V
Fuse capacity
DC power supply: 20 A AC power supply: 5 A
Electromag Complies with EMC Class A.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Description netic compatibility
Predicted reliability
System availability: 0.9999965 Annual average repair rate: < 1.5% Mean time to repair (MTTR): 1 hour Mean time between failures (MTBF): 33.08 years
In the case of OptiX OSN 550 equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption. Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
10.2 Packet Performance Indicators This section lists the equipment's packet performance indicators.
Table 10-2 lists the OptiX OSN 550's packet performance indicators.
Table 10-2 Packet system performance specifications
Item
Specifications
Protection
MPLS/MPLS-TP tunnel automatic protection switching (APS)
64 NOTE
MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share resources.
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW APS
Number of MPLS/MPLS-TP PW APS protection groups
64 NOTE
MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share resources.
Number of bound members
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
Link-state pass through (LPT)
16
Link aggregation group (LAG)
Number of LAGs
16
Number of members in a LAG
8
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
Number of instances supported by a port
1
Number of port groups
1
Number of ports provided by port groups
16
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
8
Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) on the packet plane
8
Mai
MPLS/MPLS-TP
128 NOTE
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
ntenance
tunnel OAM
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM
128 NOTE
MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
ETH OAM (MPLS/MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS/MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.)
Number of maintenance domains (MDs)
64
Number of maintenance associations (MAs)
64
Number of maintenance association end points (MEPs)
64
Number of maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs)
64
ATM OAM
8K
Services
E-Line services
1K NOTE
Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPWSs) share resources.
E-LAN Number of
Native ETH services: 1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
services E-LAN services (E-LAN VSIs) supported by an NE (VSI is short for virtual switch instance.)
PWE3 ETH services (VPLSs): 128 NOTE
Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPLSs) cannot coexist on the same NE.
Number of logical ports supported by a VSI (Native ETH)
1K
Number of logical ports supported by a VSI (VPLS)
128
Number of virtual user-network interfaces (V-UNIs) supported by an NE (VPLS)
Number of V-UNIs Number of VLANs
32 4096
64 2047
128 1023
256 511
512 255
1024 127
Number of split
3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
horizon groups supported by a VSI
Number of logical ports supported by an NE
1K
CES services
256
ATM services
Number of local services
128
Number of remote services
256
Multi-Link Point-to-Point Protocol (ML-PPP)
Number of ML-PPP groups supported by an NE
64
Number of PPP links supported by an NE
504
Number of member links supported in an ML-PPP group
16
IGMP
Number of multicast groups
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
snooping
Number of members in a multicast group
1K
QoS
Number of port weighted random early discard (WRED) policies
8
Number of virtual user-network interface (V-UNI) ingress policies
256
Number of port policies
256
Number of Differentiated Services (DiffServ) domains
8
Number of port flows
512
Number of V-UNI ingress flows
512
Number of traffic classification rules
1
Number of access control lists (ACLs)
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
Others
Number of MPLS tunnels
Unidirectional: 1K Bidirectional: 512 NOTE One bidirectional MPLS tunnel is counted as two unidirectional MPLS tunnels. If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must
not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
Tunnel bandwidth
10 Gbit/s
Number of static PWs
1K NOTE
If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
PW bandwidth
10 Gbit/s
Number of MS-PWs
128
Number of QinQ links
1K
MAC addresses
Number of static MAC addresses supported by an E-LAN
512
Number of MAC addresses supported by E-LAN services
16K
Number of
16K
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item
Specifications
MAC addresses supported by an NE
VLAN ID range supported by a port
1 to 4094
10.3 TDM Performance Indicators This section lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators.
Table 10-3 lists the OptiX OSN 550's TDM performance indicators.
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 550 TDM functions and features
Item Description
Service Service Category Maximum Receiving Capability
Service Port
Description Connector
SDH service 26xSTM-1 S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports
STM-1 SFP electrical ports
optical port: LC
Electrical port: SAA straight female
14xSTM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1 and L-4.2 optical ports
LC
2xSTM-16 S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical ports
LC
PDH service 252xE1/T1 E1 (75/120-ohm)/T1 (100-ohm)
Anea 96
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Description electrical ports
18xE3/T3 E3 (75-ohm)/T3 (75-ohm) electrical ports
SMB
Ethernet service: Ethernet private line
(EPL) services Ethernet virtual private
line (EVPL) services Ethernet private LAN
(EPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge)
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services (based on the IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad bridges)
48xFE 10/100BASE-T(X)
RJ45
6xGE 1000BASE-SX/LX/VX/ZX
1000BASE-T
LC
Protection SNCP SNCP at the VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 1032 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms
Ring MSP Ring MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of protection groups: 13 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms
Linear MSP Linear MSP at the STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 levels Maximum number of 1+1/1:1 linear MSP protection
groups: 13 Switching duration: ≤ 50 ms
Maintenance
PRBS Supported
Port mirroring
EFS8 supports port mirroring that enables Ethernet service testing and service fault diagnosis without affecting the services. Supports local port mirroring. Supports ingress and egress port mirroring.
Synchronization
Physical layer clocks: Including external clocks, line clocks, tributary clocks, and internal
clocks. The port impedance is 120 ohms or 75 ohms (a converter can be used to provide a 75-ohm clock port).
Non-synchronization status message (SSM), standard SSM, and extended
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Description SSM protocols
Tributary retiming and transparent transmission of tributary clocks Locked mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode
10.4 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board This section lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the equipment supports.
Table 10-4 lists the power consumption and weight of each board that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Table 10-4 Power consumption and weight of each board that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Board Power Consumption (Room temperature (25°C))(W)
Weight (kg)
PCX PCXLX: 45 PCXX: 44.5 PCXLG/PCXGA: 37 PCXGB: 36.5
0.80
CXL 21 0.50
MD1 12.2 0.50
EM6T 10.4 0.37
EM6F 11.3 0.40
EF8F 23 0.55
EG4C 4xGE optical ports: 12.5 4xGE electrical ports: 11.0
0.45
EX1 11 0.48
CQ1 11.5 0.47
SL1D 3.5 0.30
SL4D 3.7 0.30
SL1Q 4.5 0.30
SP3D 11.9 0.85
PL3T 4.5 0.30
EFS8 13.0 0.65
EGT1 8.3 0.60
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Board Power Consumption (Room temperature (25°C))(W)
Weight (kg)
DMD2 0.5 0.72
AUX 2.2 0.30
PIU 0.5 0.12
APIU 20.0 1.93
FAN 12.0 0.30
10.5 Optical Port Specifications This section lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports and GE optical ports.
Specifications of STM-1 Optical Ports Table 10-5 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports.
Table 10-5 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Optical port type S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Transmission distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-28 -34 -34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Value
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 10-6 lists the specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports.
Table 10-6 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports
Parameter Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern NRZ
Type of optical interface
S-1.1 L-1.1
Transmission distance (km)
15 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.5 10
Specifications of STM-4 Optical Ports Table 10-7 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s
Optical port type S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Transmission distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-28 -28 -28
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8 -8 -8
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 10 10
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-4.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-4.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "4" represents STM-4 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 10-8 lists the specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports.
Table 10-8 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Type of optical interface
S-4.1 L-4.1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Parameter
Value
Transmission distance (km)
15 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit wavelength (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating receive wavelength (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9 9
Specifications of STM-16 Optical Ports Table 10-9 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports.
Table 10-9 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s
Optical port type S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Transmission distance (km)
15 40 80
Operating wavelength range
1260 to 1360 1280 to 1335 1500 to 1580
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Value (nm)
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-5 to 0 -2 to +3 -2 to +3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-18 -27 -28
Minimum overload (dBm)
0 -9 -9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2 8.2
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Specifications of FE Optical Ports Table 10-10 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports.
Table 10-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port type
100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX
Optical fiber type
Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
2 15 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver minimum
-30 -28 -34 -34
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Value sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload (dBm)
-14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10 8.2 10 10
Table 10-11 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports.
Table 10-11 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Parameter Value
Type of optical interface
100Base-BX
Transmission distance (km)
15 40
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit wavelength (nm)
1550 1310 1550 1310
Operating receive wavelength (nm)
1310 1550 1310 1550
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-15 to -8 -5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-32 -32
Minimum overload (dBm)
-8 -10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.5 10
Table 10-12 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-12 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports
Item Performance
Frame Length (Bytes)
Throughput (pks/sec)
Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back (Frames)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00
Specifications of GE Optical Ports Table 10-13 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports.
Table 10-13 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port type
1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX
Optical fiber type
Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
0.5 10 40 80
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-17 -20 -23 -23
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Value overload (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9 9 9 9
With different SFP modules, the equipment provides GE optical ports with different types and transmission distances.
Table 10-14 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports.
Table 10-14 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports
Parameter
Value
Type of optical interface
1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
Transmission distance (km)
10 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit wavelength (nm)
1490 1310 1490 1310
Operating receive wavelength (nm)
1310 1490 1310 1490
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-9 to -3 -2 to 3
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-19.5 -23
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3 -3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Parameter
Value
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9 9
Table 10-15 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports.
Table 10-15 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports
Item Performance
Frame Length (Bytes)
Throughput (pks/sec)
Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back (Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 9.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 11.80 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 17.30 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 25.00 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 29.20 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 31.30 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 33.40 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 37.40 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 98.00 0.00 64970.00
Specifications of 10GE Optical Ports Table 10-16 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports.
Table 10-16 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports
Item Value
Optical port type
10GBASE-SR (LAN)/10GBASE-SW (WAN)
10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBASE-LW (WAN)
10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBASE-EW (WAN)
10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Optical fiber type
Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
0.3 10 40 80
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Value
Operating wavelength (nm)
840 to 860 1260 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565
Mean launched power (dBm)
-1.3 to -7.3 -6 to -1 -1 to +2 0 to 4
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-7.5 -11 -15 -24
Minimum overload (dBm)
-1 0.5 -1 -7
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
3 6 8.2 9
10.6 Colored Optical Ports This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment.
GE Optical Port Table 10-17 lists the parameters specified for the colored GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Table 10-17 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
1,250,000 kbit/s
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
40 80
Launched optical power range (dBm)
0 to 5 0 to 5
Operating wavelength
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Parameter Value
CWDM range (nm)
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2
10GE Optical Port Table 10-18 and Table 10-19 list the parameters specified for the colored 10GE optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Table 10-18 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km) 70
Launched optical power range (dBm)
0 to 4
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23 1571 nm: -22 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm) -9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-19 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
40 80
Launched optical power range (dBm)
-1 to +2 -1 to +3
Central frequency (THz)
192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency deviation (GHz)
±10 ±10
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-17 -24
Minimum overload (dBm)
-1 -9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
9.5 8.2
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 Optical Port Table 10-20 and Table 10-21 list the parameters specified for the colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports of the OptiX OSN equipment that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Table 10-20 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate
155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16)
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km)
40 80
Launched optical power
0 to 5 0 to 5
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Parameter Value
CWDM range (dBm)
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-19 -28
Minimum overload (dBm)
-3 -9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 8.2
Table 10-21 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate 2,488,320 kbit/s
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission distance (km) 120
Launched optical power range (dBm) -1 to +3
Central frequency (THz) 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency deviation (GHz) ±10
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -28
Minimum overload (dBm) -9
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2
10.7 Electrical Port Specifications This section lists the equipment's electrical port specifications. The equipment's electrical ports include PDH electrical ports, CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports, and Ethernet electrical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Specifications of E1/T1 Electrical Ports
Table 10-22 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports.
Table 10-22 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports
Electrical Port Type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Code pattern B8ZS code, AMI code HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Signal bit rate at the output port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Permitted frequency deviation at the input port
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.824.
Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Anti-interference capability at the input port
- Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Reflection attenuation at the input and output ports
- Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Combined jitter
Jitter transfer function - Complies with ITU-T G.742.
Port type Anea 96
Specifications of E3/T3 Electrical Ports Table 10-23 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports.
Table 10-23 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS
Connector SMB SMB
Port impedance (ohm) 75 75
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Value
Signal bit rate at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at the input port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823.
Complies with ITU-T G.824.
Specifications of STM-1 Electrical Ports Table 10-24 lists the specifications of the
OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 electrical ports.
Table 10-24 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern CMI
Connector SAA straight female
Signal bit rate at the output port
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at the input port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Input jitter tolerance
Specifications of CES/ATM/IMA Service Electrical Ports Table 10-25 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-25 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports
Item Value
Standard compliance ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Pair in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
Port type Anea 96
Specifications of Ethernet Electrical Ports Table 10-26 lists the specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports.
Table 10-26 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports
Service Port Port Rate Code Pattern Port Type
GE/FE electrical port
10BASE-T Manchester coding signals
RJ45
GE/FE electrical port
100BASE-TX MLT-3 coding signals
GE electrical port
1000BASE-T 4D-PAM5 coding signals
Table 10-27 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports.
Table 10-27 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports
Item Performance
Frame Length (Bytes)
Throughput (pks/sec)
Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back (Frames)
64.00 148810.00 12.80 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 17.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 28.00 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 48.40 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 89.40 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 109.80 0.00 48075.00
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Performance
Frame Length (Bytes)
Throughput (pks/sec)
Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back (Frames)
1518.00 8126.00 129.00 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 167.50 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 773.10 0.00 6459.00
Table 10-28 lists the Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports.
Table 10-28 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports
Item Performance
Frame Length (Bytes)
Throughput (pks/sec)
Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%)
Back-to-Back (Frames)
64.00 1488095.00 7.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 7.40 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 8.40 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 10.60 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 14.70 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 17.00 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 18.90 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 22.60 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 83.40 0.00 64970.00
10.8 Auxiliary Port Specifications This section lists the specifications of auxiliary ports including synchronous data ports, asynchronous data ports, orderwire ports, and external clock ports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
External Clock Ports
Table 10-29 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external clock ports
Item Value
External synchronous source 2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz (in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy In compliance with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range
Noise generation
Noise toleration
Noise transfer
Transient response and holdover performance
Synchronization clock transfer accuracy
< 50 ppb
External Time Ports
Table 10-30 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external time ports
Item Value
Port type 1PPS+TOD DCLS
Electrical specifications RS-422
Protocol type 1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)
Synchronous Data Ports
Table 10-31 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's synchronous data ports
Item Value
Transmission channel Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 64
Port type Codirectional
Port characteristics In compliance with ITU-T G.703
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Asynchronous Data Ports
Table 10-32 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's asynchronous data ports
Item Value
Transmission channel User-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-232
Orderwire Ports
Table 10-33 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's orderwire ports
Item Value
Transmission channel Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type Addressing call
Pair in each direction One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm) 600
Outdoor Cabinet Monitoring Ports
Table 10-34 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's outdoor cabinet monitoring ports
Item Value
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-485
10.9 Indicator Status Explanation This section provides status explanation for indicators on boards.
There is no indicator on the OptiX OSN 550 chassis.
Table 10-35 provides status explanation for indicators on the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-35 Status explanation for indicators on the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB)/CXL/MD1/EM6T/EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/EX1/CQ1/SL1D/SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/PL3T/EFS8/EGT1/AUX
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off The board is not working or created.
There is no power supplied to the board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB)/CXL/EM6T/EM6F/EFS8
Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
The software is running properly.
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board.
The pluggable
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board storage card is faulty.
Off The board is not powered on or works in low-power mode.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB)/CXL On (red) The clock source is
lost or a clock switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system/service is normal.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB)/CXL/MD1/EM6T/EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/EX1/CQ1/SL1D/SL4D/SL1Q/SP3D/PL3T/EFS8/EGT1/AUX
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the system/service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system/service.
Off For a PCX board: − In an
unprotected system, there is no power supplied to the system.
− In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one.
For a service board, no service is configured.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB)/CXL/EGT1
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board works
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board as the standby one.
In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.
LINK1/LINK2 On (green) The GE port is connected correctly, but is not receiving or transmitting data.
EM6F/EGT1
Blinks (yellow) The GE port is receiving or transmitting data.
Off The GE port is not connected or is abnormal.
OPM Blinks (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off
The received optical power is excessively high.
EGT1
Blinks (red) once every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off
The received optical power is excessively low.
Blinks (yellow) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off
The transmitted optical power is excessively high.
Blinks (yellow) once every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off
The transmitted optical power is excessively low.
Off Any of the following states (including but not limited to) occurs: The optical
power is normal. No optical
module is installed.
An incorrect optical module is installed.
The E2ROM information about the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board installed optical module cannot be read correctly.
The optical fiber is disconnected or the port is disabled.
LOS/LOS1/LOS2/LOS3/LOS4
On (red) The optical port on the board is reporting an R_LOS alarm.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXLG)/SL1D/SL4D/SL1Q/CXL/CQ1
Blinks (red) three times every second
The optical port on the board receives too strong power.
Blinks (red) once every second
The optical port on the board receives too weak power.
Blinks (red) once every three seconds
The optical port on the board is reporting an MS_RDI alarm.
Off The optical port on the board is free of R_LOS alarms.
L/A On (green) The port is connected correctly (link up), but is not receiving or transmitting data.
PCX (PCXLX/PCXX/PCXLG/PCXGA/PCXGB)/EF8F/EG4C/EX1
Blinks (red) three times every second, 300 ms on and 300 ms off
The port on the board receives too strong power.
Blinks (red) once every second, 300 ms on and 700 ms off
The port on the board receives too weak power.
Blinks (orange) The port is connected correctly (link up), and is receiving and transmitting data.
Off The optical fiber is not connected to the port, or the port is abnormal (link
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board down/LOS).
PWR On (green) Power is being supplied.
PIU
Off Power is off or power supplies are connected incorrectly.
FAN On (green) The FAN board is working properly.
FAN
On (red) The FAN board is free of critical/major alarms.
On (yellow) The FAN board is free of minor alarms.
Off The FAN board is not powered on or is not installed.
CRIT/MAJ/MIN On (red) The NE has a critical/major alarm.
FAN
On (yellow) The NE has a minor alarm.
Off The NE is free of critical/major/minor alarms.
INPUT On (green) The voltage of the input power is within the specified range.
APIU
On (red) Undervoltage or overvoltage occurs in the input power.
OUTPUT On (green) The voltage of the output power is within the specified range.
APIU
On (red) Undervoltage or overvoltage occurs in the output power.
ALM On (red) The rectifier module is faulty. In normal situations, the indicator is off.
Rectifier module of UPM
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Indicator State Meaning Applicable Board
Vout On (green) The output of the rectifier module is normal.
RUN Flashing (green) The entire power system is normal.
Monitoring module of UPM
ALM On (red) The entire power system is faulty. In normal situations, the indicator is off.
10.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 550 has passed many safety certifications.
Table 10-36 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has passed.
Table 10-36 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 550 has passed
Item Standard
Electromagnetic compatibility CE certification ETSI EN 301 489-1 ETSI EN 301 489-4 CISPR 22 EN 55022
Surge protection ITU-T K.27 ETSI EN 300 253
Safety CE certification ETSI EN 60215 ETSI EN 60950 IEC 60825 GB 4943
Environmental protection RoHS REACH
10.11 Environmental Specifications The OptiX OSN 550 requires proper environments for storage, transportation, and operation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
10.11.1 Storage Environment This section provides the requirements on the storage environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 10-37 lists climate requirements.
Table 10-37 Climate requirements
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirements Requirements for storing equipment on site: Generally, the equipment must be stored indoors.
No water should remain on the floor or leak into equipment crates. The equipment should be placed away from areas where water leakage is possible (for example, do not place near automatic fire-fighting extinguishing and heating systems).
Ensure that all the following four conditions are met if the equipment is stored outdoors:
Crates are intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken to prevent water from entering crates. No water is on the ground where crates are placed and water is not seeped into crates. Crates are not exposed to direct sunlight.
Biological Environment Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust. Table 10-38 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-38 Density requirements for mechanically active substances
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Suspended dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m²·h
Sand particles ≤ 300 mg/m3
Table 10-39 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 10-39 Density requirements for chemically active substances
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CL2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCL ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 10-40 lists requirements for mechanical stress.
Table 10-40 Requirements for mechanical stress
Item Sub-item Specification
Sinusoidal vibration Displacement 1.5 mm
Acceleration 5 m/s2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Static load Static pressure Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
NOTE Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
10.11.2 Transportation Environment This section provides the requirements on the transportation environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 10-41 lists climate requirements.
Table 10-41 Climate requirements
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C to +70°C
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C/min
Relative humidity 5% to 100%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproofing Requirement Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
Crates are intact. Proper rain-proofing measures are taken for vehicles to prevent water from entering
crates. No water is present in vehicles.
Biological Environment Avoid multiplication of microbes (such as eumycete and mycete). Control and exclude rodents (such as mice).
Air Cleanliness The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or
corrosive dust. Table 10-42 lists the density requirements for mechanically active substances.
Table 10-42 Density requirements for mechanically active substances
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Suspended dust No requirement
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2·h
Sand particles ≤ 100 mg/m3
Table 10-43 lists the density requirements for chemically active substances.
Table 10-43 Density requirements for chemically active substances
Chemically Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NOx ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3
CL2 -
HCL ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.03 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress Table 10-44 lists requirements for mechanical stress.
Table 10-44 Requirements for mechanical stress
Item Sub-item Specification
Random vibration Acceleration spectral density
1 m2/s3 -3 dBA
Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock Shock response spectrum I (weight of sample > 50 kg)
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times for each panel
Shock response spectrum II (weight of sample ≤ 50 kg)
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times for each panel
Drop Weight (kg) Height (m)
< 10 1.0
< 15 1.0
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Sub-item Specification
< 20 0.8
< 30 0.6
< 40 0.5
< 50 0.4
< 100 0.3
> 100 0.1
Static load Static pressure Static pressure = Product weight x (Maximum number of stacked layers that is specified on the product package - 1) x 5 x 9.8 (N)
NOTE A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input. Static load is the pressure from the upside that the packaged equipment can tolerate when equipment is stacked in the specified manner.
10.11.3 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed in a Cabinet)
This section provides the requirements on the operating environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 10-45 and Table 10-46 list climate requirements.
Table 10-45 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Operating Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to +55°C
Extreme operating temperature: -5°C to +65°C
5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of a chassis. Extreme operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours every day and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
Table 10-46 Other climate requirements
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Specification
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature change rate ≤ 30°C/h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s²
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²
Wind speed ≤ 5 m/s
Water Resistance and Dust Resistance If a cabinet is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain, the cabinet must
meet the requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The first numeral "3" indicates that the cabinet can prevent a solid object with a diameter equal to or greater than 2.5 mm from entering the cabinet. The second numeral "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have no harmful effects.)
Ensure that there is no mouse in an equipment room, preventing mouse urine from entering a cabinet.
Corrosion Protection Sites must meet the following anti-corrosion requirements:
Sites must be kept away from pollution sources. If pollution sources cannot be avoided, sites must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources, or cabinets providing sufficient protection must be used.
− For sources of heavy pollution such as metal smelting plants and coal mines, keep a minimum distance of 5 km.
− For sources of medium pollution such as chemical factories, rubber factories, electroplating factories, agricultural fertilizer factories, paper mills, and power plants, keep a minimum distance of 3.7 km.
− For sources of light pollution such as food factories, leather factories, daily necessities factories, and livestock farms, keep a minimum distance of 2 km.
Equipment rooms must be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lakes, and must be kept away from roads or sand fields with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be met, cabinets providing sufficient protection must be used.
Equipment rooms must be isolated from sewer outlets, sewage treatment tanks, and industrial/heating boilers, to prevent corrosive gases from eroding components and circuit boards.
Do not install network boxes in underground garages or other garages. If a network box can be installed only in a garage, install it at a well-ventilated place and avoid car exhausts, or select a network box providing sufficient protection.
Power on equipment within seven days after it is installed in a cabinet.
Table 10-47 shows the content limits on corrosive gases.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Table 10-47 Content limits on corrosive gases
Item Content
SO2 ≤ 1.50 mg/m³
H2S ≤ 0.03 mg/m³
NH3 ≤0.150 mg/m³
Cl2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m³
The requirements for relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents are provided as follows:
The relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents must be below 80%. If the relative humidity exceeds 80%, the anti-corrosion measures that the equipment provides can only decrease but not eliminate corrosion risks.
If the humidity control measures that equipment rooms provide cannot keep the relative humidity in the equipment rooms below 80%, adopt appropriate measures listed in Table 10-48.
Table 10-48 Measures for maintaining the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents below 80%
Heat Dissipation Method That Equipment Uses
Heat Dissipation Method That Cabinets Use
Suggestion Remarks
Natural dissipation
Natural dissipation
None None
Natural dissipation
Fan cooling
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face cabinets' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Natural dissipation
Using open racks
Air conditioners and fans must not blow directly towards equipment, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Fan cooling
Natural dissipation
Keep a distance greater than 150 mm between equipment's air intake vents and cabinets' air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering equipment.
Ensure that cabinets have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering cabinets.
None
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Heat Dissipation Method That Equipment Uses
Heat Dissipation Method That Cabinets Use
Suggestion Remarks
Fan cooling
Fan cooling
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face cabinets' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
Ensure that cabinets have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering cabinets.
Cabinets must use temperature-controlled fans, to prevent damp/cold air from entering cabinets. To be specific, fans start at high temperature and stop at low temperature. It is recommended that fans start when the temperature at cabinets' air outlets exceeds 40°C and stop when the temperature is lower than 35°C.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30°C, the relative humidity is below 80% in most areas. In addition, the temperature at cabinets' air outlets is higher than the ambient temperature. Therefore, it is recommended that fans stop when the temperature at cabinets' air outlets is lower than 35°C.
Fan cooling
Using open racks
The humidity control measures that equipment rooms provide must ensure that the relative humidity in the equipment rooms is below 80%; otherwise, corrosion risks cannot be avoided.
Air conditioners must not blow cold air directly towards equipment, to prevent the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents from increasing.
If equipment rooms use air conditioners to decrease temperature, close doors immediately after your entrance, to prevent damp air from condensing.
None
Mechanical Stress Table 10-49 lists requirements for mechanical stress.
Table 10-49 Requirements for mechanical stress
Item Sub-item Specification
Sinusoidal vibration Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Sub-item Specification
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s²
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock Shock response spectrum II
Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s², 11 ms, 3 in each direction
NOTE A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.
10.11.4 Operating Environment (For the Chassis That Is Installed on a Wall)
This section provides the requirements on the operating environment for the OptiX OSN 550.
Climate Table 10-50 and Table 10-51 list climate requirements.
Table 10-50 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Operating Temperature Relative Humidity
Long-term operating temperature: -5°C to +55°C
Extreme operating temperature: -5°C to +65°C
5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity are measured 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m ahead of a chassis. Extreme operating indicates that the continuous operating time of the equipment does not exceed 4 hours and the accumulated annual operating time does not exceed 90 days.
Table 10-51 Other climate requirements
Item Specification
Altitude ≤ 4000 m
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature change rate ≤ 30°C/h
Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s²
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s²
Wind speed ≤ 5 m/s
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Water Resistance
Water resistance requirements for network boxes are provided as follows: − If a network box is installed indoors or in a corridor that is free from rain, the network box must meet the
requirements of IP31 rating protection. (The first numeral "3" indicates that the network box can prevent a solid object with a diameter equal to or greater than 2.5 mm from entering the network box. The second numeral "1" indicates that vertically falling drops shall have no harmful effects.)
− If a network box is installed in a corridor that is exposed to rain, the network box must meet the requirements of IP55 rating protection. ("IP" indicates international protection rating. The first numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing solid objects from entering network boxes. That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of equipment or to impair safety. The second numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing water from entering network boxes. That is, water projected in jets against the enclosure from any direction shall have no harmful effects.)
Requirements for installing network boxes are provided as follows: − Equipment must be installed in a position away from water drips (outdoor units and water pipes of air
conditioners, sewer pipes, or windows). − Equipment must be installed in a position not exposed to rain. − Equipment must not be installed in light-current wells or directly on the corridor ground on the first floor. − Equipment must not be mounted on a wall that is near to windows. − Route cables/fibers into network boxes only from the bottom sides. In addition, waterproof the connection
between cables/fibers and network boxes, to prevent rain from entering network boxes along cables/fibers.
Dust Resistance For dusty areas, network boxes with air filters are recommended (to improve equipment reliability) and the network boxes must meet the requirements of IP51 rating protection. (The first numeral "5" indicates the rating for preventing solid objects from entering network boxes. That is, ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust shall not penetrate in a quantity to interfere with satisfactory operation of equipment or to impair safety.)
For network boxes with air filters, clear the air filters periodically.
Corrosion Protection Sites must meet the following anti-corrosion requirements:
Sites must be kept away from pollution sources. If pollution sources cannot be avoided, sites must be located in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources, or network boxes providing sufficient protection must be used.
− For sources of heavy pollution such as metal smelting plants and coal mines, keep a minimum distance of 5 km.
− For sources of medium pollution such as chemical factories, rubber factories, electroplating factories, agricultural fertilizer factories, paper mills, and power plants, keep a minimum distance of 3.7 km.
− For sources of light pollution such as food factories, leather factories, daily necessities factories, and livestock farms, keep a minimum distance of 2 km.
Installation sites must be kept 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lakes, and must be kept away from roads or sand fields with dusts flying around. If this requirement cannot be met, network boxes providing sufficient protection must be used.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Installation sites must be isolated from sewer outlets, sewage treatment tanks, and
industrial/heating boilers, to prevent corrosive gases from eroding components and circuit boards.
Do not install network boxes in underground garages or other garages. If a network box can be installed only in a garage, install it at a well-ventilated place and avoid car exhausts, or select a network box providing sufficient protection.
Power on equipment within seven days after it is installed in a network box.
Table 10-52 shows the content limits on corrosive gases.
Table 10-52 Content limits on corrosive gases
Item Content
SO2 ≤ 1.50 mg/m³
H2S ≤ 0.03 mg/m³
NH3 ≤ 0.15 mg/m³
Cl2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m³
The requirements for relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents are provided as follows:
The relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents must be below 80%. If the relative humidity exceeds 80%, the anti-corrosion measures that the equipment provides can only decrease but not eliminate corrosion risks.
If the humidity control measures that network boxes provide cannot keep the relative humidity in the network boxes below 80%, adopt appropriate measures listed in Table 10-53.
Table 10-53 Measures for maintaining the relative humidity at equipment's air intake vents below 80%
Heat Dissipation Method That Equipment Uses
Heat Dissipation Method That Network Boxes Use
Suggestion Remarks
Natural dissipation
Natural dissipation
None None
Natural dissipation
Fan cooling
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face network boxes' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
None
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Heat Dissipation Method That Equipment Uses
Heat Dissipation Method That Network Boxes Use
Suggestion Remarks
Fan cooling
Natural dissipation
Keep a distance greater than 150 mm between equipment's air intake vents and network boxes' air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering equipment.
Ensure that network boxes have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering the network boxes.
None
Fan cooling
Fan cooling
Ensure that equipment's air intake vents do not face network boxes' air intake vents, and keep a distance greater than 150 mm between the two types of air intake vents, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the equipment.
Ensure that network boxes have appropriate air intake vents, to prevent a large amount of damp/cold air from entering the network boxes.
Network boxes must use temperature-controlled fans, to prevent damp/cold air from entering the network boxes. To be specific, fans start at high temperature and stop at low temperature. It is recommended that fans start when the temperature at network boxes' air outlets exceeds 40°C and stop when the temperature is lower than 35°C.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30°C, the relative humidity is below 80% in most areas. In addition, the temperature at network boxes' air outlets is higher than the ambient temperature. Therefore, it is recommended that fans stop when the temperature at network boxes' air outlets is lower than 35°C.
Mechanical Stress Table 10-54 lists requirements for mechanical stress.
Table 10-54 Requirements for mechanical stress
Item Sub-item Specification
Sinusoidal vibration Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s²
Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 10 Technical Specifications
Item Sub-item Specification
Shock Shock response spectrum II
Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s², 11 ms, 3 in each direction
NOTE A shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, such as shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
11 Energy Saving and Environmental Protection
The OptiX 550 complies with RoHS directive (2002/95/EC), WEEE directive (2002/96/EC) and REACH (REGULATION (EC) No 1907/2006).
Energy Saving The OptiX OSN 550 adopts a variety of technologies to reduce equipment energy.
Uses an easy scheme for board design. Replaces ordinary chips with ASIC chips that require low power consumption. Uses highly efficient power modules.
Environmental Protection The equipment is designed according to the requirements of environmental protection. The equipment complies with RoHS/REACH directive.
The equipment is amply packaged while materials as conserved. The size of the package containing the equipment and accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment.
The product is also designed for easy unpacking. All hazardous substances contained in the packaging decompose easily.
Every plastic component that weighs over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4.
All components and packages of the equipment are provided with standard labels for recycling.
Plugs and connectors are easy to find, and the associated operations can be performed by using simple tools.
All the attached materials, such as labels, are easy to remove. Certain types of identifying information, such as silkscreens, are printed on front panels
or subracks.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
12 Standard Compliance
About This Chapter This section lists the standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations
This section lists the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.2 IETF Standards
This section lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.3 IEEE Standards
This section lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.4 Environment Related Standards
This section lists the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.5 MEF Standards
This section lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.6 Safety Standards
This section lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.7 EMC Standards
This section lists the EMC Standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.8 Protection Standards
This section lists the protection standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
12.1 ITU-T Recommendations This section lists the ITU-T Recommendations that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Table 12-1 ITU-T Recommendations
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems
ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.703 Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44,736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T G.706 Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704
ITU-T G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems
ITU-T G.774 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.1 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) performance monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.2 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of the payload structure for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.3 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of multiplex-section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.4 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of the sub-network connection protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.5 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of connection supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.6 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) unidirectional performance monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.7 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management of lower order path trace and interface labeling for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.9 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.774.10 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) configuration of linear multiplex section protection for the network element view
ITU-T G.775 Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for PDH signals
ITU-T G.7710 Common equipment management function requirements
ITU-T G.780 Vocabulary of terms for synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
networks and equipment
ITU-T G.781 Synchronization layer functions
ITU-T G.782 Types and Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.784 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management
ITU-T G.803 Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.805 Generic functional architecture of transport networks
ITU-T G.806 Characteristics of transport equipment - Description methodology and generic functionality
ITU-T G.808.1 Generic protection switching - Linear trail and sub-network protection
ITU-T G.810 Definitions and terminology for synchronization networks
ITU-T G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T G.812 Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as node clocks in synchronization networks
ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
ITU-T G.821 Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network
ITU-T G.822 Controlled slip rate objectives on an international digital connection
ITU-T G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
ITU-T G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate
ITU-T G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator sections
ITU-T G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.832 Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks - Frame and multiplexing structures
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.842 Inter-working of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
ITU-T G.7043/Y.1343
Virtual concatenation of plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) signals
ITU-T G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer networks
ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet over transport NNI
ITU-T G.8021 Characteristics of Ethernet transport network equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture
ITU-T G.8110.1
Application of MPLS/MPLS-TP in the transport network
ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS) hierarchy
ITU-T G.8131 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks
ITU-T G.8261 Timing and synchronization aspects in packet networks
ITU-T G.8262 Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave clock (EEC)
ITU-T G.8264 Timing distribution through packet networks
ITU-T Y.1541 Network performance objectives for IP-based services
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1730 Requirements for OAM functions in Ethernet based networks and Ethernet services
ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks
ITU-T I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions
ITU-T Y.1291 An architectural framework for support of quality of service (QoS) in
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Recommendation
Description
packet networks
ITU-T G.652 Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
ITU-T G.655 Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode optical fiber and cable
ITU-T G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and subsystems
ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality for MPLS networks
ITU-T Y.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet based networks
ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet ring protection switching
ITU-T G.8113.1 Operations, administration and maintenance mechanism for MPLS-TP networks (G.tpoam)
12.2 IETF Standards This section lists the IETF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Table 12-2 IETF standards
Standard Description
RFC 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base
draft-ietf-l2vpn-oam-req-frmk-05
L2VPN OAM requirements and framework
RFC 4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual private networks (L2VPNs)
RFC 3031 MPLS architecture
RFC 3469 Framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)-based recovery
RFC 3811 Definitions of textual conventions for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management
RFC 3813 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) label switching router (LSR) management information base
RFC 3814 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) forwarding equivalence class to next hop label forwarding entry (FEC-To-NHLFE) management information base
RFC 4115 A differentiated service two-rate, three-color marker with efficient handling of in-profile traffic
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Standard Description
RFC 4221 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) management overview
RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM) requirements for multi-protocol label switched (MPLS) networks
RFC 4378 A framework for multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) operations and management (OAM)
RFC 3032 MPLS label stack encoding
RFC 3443 Time to live (TTL) processing in multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) networks
RFC 3916 Requirements for pseudo-wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
RFC 3985 Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) architecture
RFC 4197 Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation of time division multiplexed (TDM) circuits over packet switching networks
RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 4446 IANA allocations for pseudowire edge to edge emulation (PWE3)
RFC 0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol
RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services
RFC 4448 Encapsulation methods for transport of Ethernet over MPLS networks
RFC 4553 Structure-agnostic time division multiplexing (TDM) over packet (SAToP)
RFC 5085 Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV)
RFC 5086 Structure-Aware Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) Circuit Emulation Service over Packet Switched Network (CESoPSN)
RFC 4717 Encapsulation Methods for Transport of Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) over MPLS Networks
RFC 4816 Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service
RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) control word for use over an MPLS PSN
RFC 5254 Requirements for Multi-Segment Pseudowire Emulation
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Standard Description Edge-to-Edge (PWE3)
draft-ietf-pwe3-segmented-pw-03
Segmented pseudo wire
draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-pw-requirements-03
Requirements for inter domain pseudo-wires
draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-pw-arch-02 An architecture for multi-segment pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
RFC 3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Information model
RFC 2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service
RFC 2474 Definition of the differentiated services field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 headers
RFC 2475 An architecture for differentiated services
RFC 2597 Assured forwarding PHB group
RFC 2698 A two rate three color marker
RFC 3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hop behavior)
RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS) support of differentiated services
RFC 5586 MPLS generic associated channel
RFC 5654 Requirements of an MPLS transport profile
RFC 5921 A framework for MPLS in transport networks
RFC 5860 Requirements for operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) in MPLS transport networks
RFC 1990 The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 5317 Joint Working Team (JWT) Report on MPLS Architectural Considerations for a Transport Profile
draft-ietf-mpls-tp-oam-analysis An Overview of the OAM Tool Set for MPLS based Transport Networks
STD 0062 An Architecture for Describing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks
12.3 IEEE Standards This section lists the IEEE standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Table 12-3 IEEE standards
Standard Description
IEEE 802.1D Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks
IEEE 802.1ad Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges
IEEE 802.3ah Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment: Media Access Control Parameters, Physical Layers, and Management Parameters for Subscriber Access Networks
IEEE 802.1ag Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks - Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management
IEEE 802.3 Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u Type 100BASE-T MAC parameters, Physical Layer, MAUs, and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation
IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex Operation and Type 100BASE-T2
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol
12.4 Environment Related Standards This section lists the environment related standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Table 12-4 Environment related standards
Standard Description
CISPR 22 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of information
EN 60950-1 Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1: General requirements
UL 1950-1 Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1: General requirements
IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products-Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Standard Description and user's guide
IEC 60825-2 Safety of laser products-Part 2: Safety of optical fiber communication systems (OFCS)
IEC 60950-1 Information technology equipment-Safety-Part 1: General requirements
IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 2: Testing and measurement techniques Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test Basic EMC Publication
IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility; Part 3: Testing and measurement techniques Section 3 radio frequency electromagnetic fields; immunity test.
IEC 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test Basic EMC publication
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 5: Testing and measurement techniques Section 5: Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility: Part 6: Testing and measurement techniques: Section 6 conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields; immunity test
ETSI EN 300 019-1-3
Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment
ETS 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE); Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
IEC 60825 Safety of laser products
IEC 60297 Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series
IEC 60068-2 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures
IEC 60068-3-3 Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information - Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6 Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake vibration
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 1: Storage
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1 Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations
ETS 300 019-1-3 Partly temperature-controlled location
ETS 300 119 Equipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunications standard for equipment practice
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Standard Description
ETS 300 417 Generic requirements of transport functionality of equipment
EN 300 132 Equipment Engineering (EE); Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications equipment
12.5 MEF Standards This section lists the MEF standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Table 12-5 MEF standards
Standard Description
MEF 2
Requirements and framework for Ethernet service protection in metro Ethernet networks
MEF 4 Metro Ethernet network architecture framework - Part 1: generic framework
MEF 9 Abstract Test Suite for Ethernet Services at the UNI
MEF 10 Ethernet services attributes phase 1
MEF 14 Abstract Test Suite for Traffic Management Phase 1
12.6 Safety Standards This section lists the safety standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Table 12-6 Safety standards
Safety Standard Description
EN 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser equipment
IEC 60825-2 Safety of laser equipment - requirement of OFCS
EN 60950 Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment including electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Safety Standard Description
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No 950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC 2006/95/EC
UL60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety
EG 201 212 Electrical safety; Classification of interfaces for equipment to be connected to telecommunication networks
ITU-T G.644 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport systems
12.7 EMC Standards This section lists the EMC Standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Table 12-7 EMC related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61000-4-2 EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 EN 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4 EN 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-4: Testing and measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-5: Testing and measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6 EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-6: Testing and measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-29 EN 61000-4-29
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power port immunity tests
CISPR 22/EN 55022 Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024 Information technology equipment-immunity characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description 12 Standard Compliance
Standard Description
ETSI EN 300386 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Telecommunication network equipment; ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Additional ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300127 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Radiated emission testing of physically large telecommunication systems
ETSI EN 300132-2 Power supply interface at the input to telecommunications equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
12.8 Protection Standards This section lists the protection standards that the OptiX OSN 550 complies with.
Table 12-8 Protection related standards
Standard Description
IEC 61024-1 Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1 Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I: general principles
IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11 Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20 Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to overvoltages and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27 Bonding configurations and earthing inside a telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41 Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication centers to surge overvoltages
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
1+1 backup A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to ensure that the system service is not interrupted.
1:N protection An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
A
A/D analog/digit
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AAL See ATM Adaptation Layer.
AAL2 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5
ABR See available bit rate.
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization.
ACH associated channel header
ACL See access control list.
ACL rule A rule for controlling the access of users.
ADM add/drop multiplexer
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
AF See assured forwarding.
AGC automatic gain control
AIO asynchronous input/output
AIS alarm indication signal
AIS insertion Insertion of AIS in a channel with excessive errors to indicate that it is unavailable. For a line board, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For tributary board at the E1/T1 level, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For tributary board at the E3 level or higher, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3 byte.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.
AM See adaptive modulation.
AMI See alternate mark inversion.
ANSI See American National Standards Institute.
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APID access point identifier
APS automatic protection switching
APS 1+1 protection A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol. Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility.
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
AS See autonomous system.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASK amplitude shift keying
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL)
An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of information, including voice, video, and data.
ATM protection group Logically bound ATM VP network/subnetwork connections that share the same physical transmission channel. In the VP Group (VPG), a pair of VP connections (working connection and its protective connection) is used for monitoring the automatic protection switching, called monitoring connections (APS VPCs). If the monitoring connections switch over, the whole VPG will switch over to quicken the ATM protection switching (as quick as the protection switching of the SDH layer).
ATPC See automatic transmit power control.
AU See administrative unit.
AUG See administrative unit group.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
AWG arrayed waveguide grating
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. ANSI participates in defining network protocol standards.
Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA)
A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the consumption of network services by users.
access A link between the customer and the telecommunication network. Many technologies, such as the copper wire, optical fiber, mobile, microwave and satellite, are used for access.
access control list (ACL) A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource.
access layer A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs.
access point Any entity that has station functionality and provides access to the distribution services, via the wireless medium (WM) for associated stations.
accumulation The sum of the service usage, consumption, and recharge fees of a subscriber.
active link A link in the link aggregation group, which is connected to the active interface.
active mode A working mode of EFM OAM. The discovery and remote loopback can only be initiated by the interface in the active mode.
adaptive modulation (AM) A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services.
adjacency A portion of the local routing information which pertains to the reachability of a single neighbor ES or IS over a single circuit. Adjacencies are used as input to the Decision Process for forming paths through the routing domain. A separate adjacency is created for each neighbor on a circuit, and for each level of routing (i.e. level 1 and level 2) on a broadcast circuit.
adjacent channel alternate polarization (ACAP)
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
adjacent concatenation A situation where the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services in SDH are consecutive in terms of their service in the frame structures, so that they use the same path overhead (POH).
administrative unit (AU) The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
(the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
administrative unit group (AUG)
One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
advanced ACL An ACL that defines ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses, protocol type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and message codes.
aggregated link Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes.
aging time The time to live before an object becomes invalid.
air interface The interface between the cellular phone set or wireless modem (usually portable or mobile) and the active base station.
alarm A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared.
alarm box A device that reflects the status of an alarm in visual-audio mode. The alarm box notifies you of the alarm generation and alarm severity after it is connected to the Signaling Network Manager server or client and the related parameters are set.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
alarm correlation analysis A process to analyze correlated alarms. For example, if alarm 2 is generated within five seconds after alarm 1 is generated, and it complies with the conditions defined in the alarm correlation analysis rule, you can either mask the alarm or raise the level of alarm 2 according to the behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule.
alarm filtering An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system, and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the NMS, but is monitored on the NE.
alarm indication A function that indicates the alarm status of an NE. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current alarm status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm inversion mode A mode for an NE that indicates whether the port is automatically restored to the normal status after the service is accessed or the fault is removed. There are three alarm inversion modes: normal, revertible and non-revertible.
alarm notification When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by users.
alarm suppression An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be suppressed are not reported from NEs any more.
alternate mark inversion A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
(AMI) logical 1 values.
analog signal A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external interference.
assured forwarding (AF) One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
attack An attempt to bypass security controls in a system with the mission of using that system or compromising it. An attack is usually accomplished by exploiting a current vulnerability.
attenuation Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels.
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic transmit power control (ATPC)
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected at the receiver
autonomous system (AS) A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas.
availability A capability of providing services at any time. The probability of this capability is called availability.
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
avalanche photodiode (APD)
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics.
average delay A performance indicator indicating the average RTT of multiple ping operations or other probe operations. It is expressed in milliseconds.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
BBE background block error
BC boundary clock
BCD binary coded decimal
BDI See backward defect indication.
BDI packet A packet used to notify the upstream LSR of the failure event which has occurred on the downstream LSR through the reverse LSP. The BDI packet can be used in the 1:1/N protective switchover service.
BE See best effort.
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BIP-X bit interleaved parity-X
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BNC See bayonet-neill-concelman.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BPS board protection switching
BSC See base station controller.
BSS base station subsystem
BTS base transceiver station
BWS backbone wavelength division multiplexing system
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)
A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Two systems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the two systems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system for a long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX and RX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load.
backbone network A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment, or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the networks connected to it.
backplane An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged.
backup A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards.
backward defect indication (BDI)
A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station area An area of radio coverage consisting of cells served by one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) in the same base station site.
base station controller (BSC)
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
baseband A form of modulation in which the information is applied directly onto the physical transmission medium.
bayonet-neill-concelman (BNC)
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
bearer An information transmission path with defined capacity, delay and bit error rate.
bearer network A network used to carry the messages of a transport-layer protocol between physical devices.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
best-effort service A unitary and simple service model. Without being approved, but after notifying the network, the application can send any number of packets at any time. The network tries its best to send the packets, but delay and reliability cannot be ensured. Best-Effort is the default service model of the Internet. It can be applied to various networks, such as FTP and E-Mail. It is implemented through the First In First-Out (FIFO) queue.
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal.
bit interleaved parity (BIP)
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
(BIP-8) (one byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the
number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
blacklist A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with ACL, the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list can filter packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the specific IP address.
bound path A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput capacity.
bridge A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses.
bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
bridging The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously.
broadband integrated services digital network (B-ISDN)
A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address.
broadcast address A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host.
broadcast domain A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame.
building integrated timing supply (BITS)
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
built-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly.
burst A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
C
CAC See connection admission control.
CAR committed access rate
CAS multiframe A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1 PCM frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits are used for multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) for synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not multiframe alignment signal (NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15 frames, timeslot 16 is used to transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M) signaling corresponding to each timeslot.
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization.
CCS See Common Channel Signaling.
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge.
CES See circuit emulation service.
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLEI common language equipment identification
CLK clock card
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
CMI coded mark inversion
CO central office
CPU See central processing unit.
CR connection request
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CRC-4 multiframe A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of timeslot 0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle and implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4 multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can check the previous check block.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.
CST See common spanning tree.
CTC common transmit clock
CV connectivity verification
CV packet A type of packet that is generated at the frequency of 1/s on the source end LSR of an LSP, and is terminated on the destination end LSR of the LSP. A CV packet is transmitted from the source end LSR to the destination LSR along the LSP. A CV packet contains the unique identifier (TTSI) of the LSP so that all types of abnormalities on the path can be detected.
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
Common Channel Signaling (CCS)
A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information from user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling information for all other channels in the system.
Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.
cabinet Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be removable.
cable distribution plate A component, which is used to arrange cables in order.
cable tie A tape used to bind cables.
carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer networking access method in which: A carrier sensing scheme is used. A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a
frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be dropped.
central processing unit (CPU)
The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
centralized alarm The alarms of all the hosts connecting to the Operation and Maintenance Unit (OMU).
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. Channels can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s, kb/s, Mb/s, Gb/s, and Tb/s.
channel spacing The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device.
check criteria A set of rules for checking and analyzing device echo information. The check criteria for an alarm collection item need to be set through the configuration file.
circuit emulation service (CES)
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
clock selection An algorithm used for selecting the best clock for clock synchronization. For different peers (multiple servers or peers configured for a client), a peer sends clock synchronization packets to each server or passive peer. After receiving the response packets, it uses the clock selection algorithm to select the best clock.
clock source A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration.
clock synchronization Also called frequency synchronization. The signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point does not need to be consistent.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in a network.
co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
collision A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time. Their interference makes both unintelligible.
committed burst size (CBS)
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
common spanning tree (CST)
A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP.
composite service An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
conference An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a focus and can be identified uniquely.
congestion An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic that results in a decrease in network service efficiency.
congestion management A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When the network congestion occurs, it places packets into the queue for buffer and determines the packet forwarding order.
connection An association of transmission channels or telecommunication circuits, switching and other functional units set up to provide for the transfer of signals between two or more network points, to support a single communication.
connection admission control (CAC)
A control process in which the network takes actions in the call set-up phase (or call re-negotiation phase) to determine which connection request is admitted.
connection point A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
connectionless Pertaining to a method of data presentation. The data has a complete destination address and is delivered by the network on a best-effort basis, independent of other data being exchanged between the same pair of users.
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
container A set of hardware or software devices. In software domain, it refers to the environment variables and processes. In hardware domain, it refers to a type of topology node that contains nodes, usually refers to one device with multiple frames; each node stands for a frame.
continuity check (CC) Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved after MEPs transmit Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically.
control VLAN A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets.
control channel The channel used to transmit digital control information from the base station to a cell phone or vice-versa.
convergence layer A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs.
cooling system The system that controls or influences climate by decreasing the air temperature only.
core layer A layer that functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks and provides high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission structure that provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer devices must have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability,
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
adaptability, and they support dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network, the core layer includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone routers.
correlation The similarities when two random processes vary with time.
corruption The alteration of the information in IMS networks for the purpose of deception. For example, attackers corrupt the correct charging information to evade being charged.
cross-connection The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections of NEs.
crossover cable A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa.
crystal oscillator An oscillator that produces electrical oscillations at a frequency determined by the physical characteristics of a piezoelectric quartz crystal.
customer edge (CE) A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
cutover To migrate the data of an application system to another application system, which then provides services.
cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
D/A digital-analog converter
DB database
DC direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground).
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return common (with ground) (DC-C)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with ground) (DC-I)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
DCC See data communications channel.
DCE See data circuit-terminating equipment.
DCF data communication function
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network.
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DLAG See distributed link aggregation group.
DM See delay measurement.
DNI dual node interconnection
DRDB dynamic random database
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP differentiated services code point
DSL See digital subscriber line.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP digital signal processing
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DTR data terminal ready
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP)
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
data backup A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of damage or failure in the original storage area.
data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE)
The equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
equipment. The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line.
data communication network (DCN)
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data communication function.
data communications channel (DCC)
The data channel that uses the D1–D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information about operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1–D3 are referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channels that are composed of bytes D4–D12 are referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
data flow A process that involves processing the data extracted from the source system, such as filtering, integration, calculation, and summary, finding and solving data inconsistency, and deleting invalid data so that the processed data meets the requirements of the destination system for the input data.
data mapping An algorithm that is used to convert the data between heterogeneous data models.
data restoration A method for retrieving data that is lost due to damage or misoperations.
data terminal equipment (DTE)
A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE.
datagram A kind of protocol data unit (PDU) which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP), such as IP datagram, UDP datagram.
defect A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function.
delay measurement (DM) The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
demodulation In communications, the means by which a modem converts data from modulated carrier frequencies (waves that have been modified in such a way that variations in amplitude and frequency represent meaningful information) over a telephone line. Data is converted to the digital form needed by a computer to which the modem is attached, with as little distortion as possible.
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
designated port A port defined in the STP protocol. On each switch that runs the STP protocol, the traffic from the root bridge is forwarded to the designated port. The subnet connected to the STP switch receives the data traffic from the root bridge. All the ports on the root bridge are designated ports. On each subnet, there is only one designated port. When a network topology is stable, only the root port and the designated port forward traffic. Other non-designated ports are in the blocking state, and they receive STP packets, but does not forward user traffic.
destruction A process during which the information and resources in a network are changed unexpectedly and the meanings of the information and resources are deleted or changed.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
digital data network (DDN)
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology.
digital modulation A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
digital network A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream.
digital signal A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference.
digital subscriber line (DSL)
A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without affecting the POTS service.
digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM)
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
dispersion The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)
A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber.
distributed link aggregation group (DLAG)
A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports.
domain A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
dotted decimal notation A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot "." with each part is in the decimal numeral.
download To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server.
downstream In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link.
dual-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (for example, "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation.
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
EA encryption algorithm
EBS See excess burst size.
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EEPROM See electrically erasable programable read-only memory.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFCI explicit forward congestion indication
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EFM OAM Ethernet in the first mile OAM
EIA See Electronic Industries Alliance.
EIR See excess information rate.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EMS element management system
EPD early packet discard
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESN See equipment serial number.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is the EIA standard for connecting serial components.
EoD See Ethernet over dual domains.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to maintain.
Ethernet aggregation (E-Aggr)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)
A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection).
Ethernet over dual domains (EoD)
A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks.
Ethernet private LAN service (EPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line (EPL)
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual private LAN service (EVPLAN)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable
egress The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled.
electric supervisory channel (ESC)
A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable programable read-only memory (EEPROM)
A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
embedded control channel (ECC)
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs.
emergency maintenance A type of measure taken to quickly rectify an emergency fault to recover the proper running of the related system or device and to reduce losses.
encapsulation A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP.
engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
enterprise system connection (ESCON)
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
entity A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered individually.
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
equipment serial number (ESN)
A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
error tolerance The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence of erroneous inputs.
event Anything that takes place on the managed object. For example, the managed object is added, deleted, or modified.
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
excess information rate (EIR)
The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the actual transmission rate without the safety rate.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
exercise switching An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The protection switching is not really performed.
expedited forwarding (EF) The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits (EXP) A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.
extended ID The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The physical ID of an NE is comprised of the NE ID and extended ID.
external cable The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.
external links The links between the current Web site and other Web sites. Generally, external links refer to links from other Web sites to the current Web site.
extract To read the data required by the destination system from the source system.
F
F1 byte The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.
FC See fiber channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDI packet See forward defect indication packet.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FE See fast Ethernet.
FE port See fast Ethernet port.
FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection
FFD packet A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same way for processing CV packets.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
FICON See Fiber Connect.
FIFO first in first out queuing
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FPS See fast protection switching.
FR See frame relay.
FRU field replaceable unit
FTN FEC to NHLFE
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fiber Connect (FICON) A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON.
fairness A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm.
fast Ethernet (FE) Any network that supports transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended based on the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers).
fast Ethernet port (FE port)
The port that provides a rate of 100 Mbit/s.
fast protection switching (FPS)
A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking function (IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services.
fault A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources or intentional settings.
fault alarm A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure, or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity than event alarms.
fault detection The process of determining that a fault has occurred.
fault notification A process wherein a fault is notified. For example, when a fault occurs on the local interface, the local interface notifies the peer of the fault through OAMPDUs. The local interface then records the fault in the log, and reports it to the NMS.
feeder 1. A radio frequency transmission line interconnecting an antenna and a transmitter or receiver. 2. For an antenna comprising more than one driven element, a radio frequency transmission Line interconnecting the antenna input and a driven element.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
fiber channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-speed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network.
fiber trough A trough that is used for routing fibers.
fiber/cable General name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform the transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relationship between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type.
field programmable gate array (FPGA)
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays.
firewall A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network as much as possible to protect the network security.
fixed bandwidth The bandwidth that is fully reserved and is allocated periodically in a GPON system to ensure the quality of cell transmission. If a T-CONT is provided with a fixed bandwidth and does not transmit cells, the OLT can still allocate/assign the fixed bandwidth. Therefore, idle cells are transmitted to the upstream OLT from the ONU/ONT.
flash memory A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data stored in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off.
flooding A type of incident, such as insertion of a large volume of data, that results in denial of service.
flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation.
flow queue The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow. HQoS performs queue scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other.
forward defect indication (FDI)
A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward defect indication packet (FDI packet)
A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of the upper layer network where failure has occurred.
forward error correction (FEC)
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
fragmentation A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node that does not support the original size of the packet.
frame delay variation (FDV)
A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake of speed.
free-run mode An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference.
frequency division duplex (FDD)
An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
full rate A type of data transmission rate. The service bandwidth can be 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, or 2.4 kbit/s.
fully loaded A state that indicates that all slots of a piece of equipment are in use, that is, the equipment has no vacant slots.
fuse A safety device that protects an electric circuit from excessive current, consisting of or containing a metal element that melts when current exceeds a specific amperage, thereby opening the circuit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GCRA generic cell rate algorithm
GE See gigabit Ethernet.
GFC generic flow control
GFP See Generic Framing Procedure.
GNE See gateway network element.
GPS See Global Positioning System.
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See Global System for Mobile Communications.
GTS See generic traffic shaping.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)
A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15.
Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE)
A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data packets.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users.
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)
The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gain The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB.
gateway A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments.
gateway network element (GNE)
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer.
general flow control A flow control that is applicable to the A interface, C/D interface, and trunks and can be achieved by integrating multiple function modules. It is adopted when the traffic is heavy, or location update and authentication of multiple subscribers are performed after the system restarts. It can efficiently prevent system breakdown caused by link congestion or CPU overload.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
(GTS) This is to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the
downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
gigabit Ethernet (GE) A collection of technologies for transmitting Ethernet frames at a rate of a gigabit per second, as defined by the IEEE 802.3z standard. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
ground terminal A connection terminal on a communication device. It is used to connect the device with ground cables, maintaining a tight connection between the device and the grounding electrode.
H
HCS higher order connection supervision
HD-SDI See high definition-serial digital interface signal.
HDB3 high density bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV See high definition television.
HEC See header error control.
HPA high order path adaptation
HPT higher order path termination
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology.
hang up A call processing mode used by an attendant to end the conversation with a user.
hardware loopback A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
header error control (HEC)
A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in the first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hello packet The commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It contains information about the DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), known neighbors and timer values.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
hierarchical quality of service (HQoS)
A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high definition television (HDTV)
A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540 progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high definition-serial digital interface signal (HD-SDI)
High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
historical performance data
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported and stored on the NMS.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot patch A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or queried.
I
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICC ITU carrier code
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
ICP IMA Control Protocol
IDU See indoor unit.
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force.
IF See intermediate frequency.
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IGP See Interior Gateway Protocol.
ILM incoming label map
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
IMA frame A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.
IP Internet Protocol
IP address A 32-bit (4-byte) binary digit that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated by periods (,), for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of an IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself.
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISDN integrated services digital network
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP See Internet service provider.
IST internal spanning tree
ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector.
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP)
A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in small-sized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R).
International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
(ITU-T) "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA)
A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol television (IPTV)
A system in which video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP", IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the images in real time.
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)
The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service provider (ISP)
An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
inbound Data transmission from the external link to the router for the routers that support the NetStream feature.
indicator Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the performance collector.
indoor unit (IDU) The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services.
input jitter tolerance The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which,
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30-second measurement intervals.
insertion loss The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler, or splice, into a previously continuous path.
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power adjustment (IPA)
A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
interleaving A process of systematically changing the bit sequence of a digital signal, usually as part of the channel coding, in order to reduce the influence of error bursts that may occur during transmission.
intermediate frequency (IF)
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal.
inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA)
A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
J
jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability.
jumper A connection wire for connecting two pins.
K
K byte A general designation of K1 byte and K2 byte in the SDH.
L
L2 switching The switching based on the data link layer.
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LBM See loopback message.
LBR See loopback reply.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCN local communications network
LCT local craft terminal
LDP Label Distribution Protocol
LED See light emitting diode.
LER See label edge router.
LIFO See last in first out.
LIU logical interface unit
LL logical link
LLC See logical link control.
LLID local loopback ID
LM See loss measurement.
LOC loss of continuity
LOM loss of multiframe
LOP loss of pointer
LOS See loss of signal.
LP lower order path
LPA low order path adaptation
LPF See low-pass filter.
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path.
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LTM See linktrace message.
LTR See linktrace reply.
LU line unit
Layer 2 switching A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
called Layer 2 switching.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad.
label A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information.
label distribution Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and the FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution.
label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label space Value range of the label allocated to peers.
label switched path (LSP) A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on common routing mechanisms or through configuration.
label switching router (LSR)
Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.
laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source.
last in first out (LIFO) A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly.
layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.
license A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the license.
light emitting diode (LED) A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers.
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
linear MSP linear multiplex section protection
link aggregation group (LAG)
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
link monitoring A mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the interface detects that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame seconds reaches or exceeds the specified threshold.
link protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided.
linktrace message (LTM) The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP. LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply (LTR) For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1.
load balancing The distribution of activity across two or more servers or components in order to avoid overloading any one with too many requests or too much traffic.
load sharing A device running mode. Two or more hardware units can averagely share the system load based on their processing capabilities when they are operating normally. When a hardware unit fails, the other units fulfill the tasks of the faulty unit on the precondition for guaranteeing system performance, for example, few call loss.
loading A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is program).
local MEP An MEP of a device on a network enabled with Ethernet CFM.
local area network (LAN) A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
logical interface An interface that does not exist physically and comes into being through configuration. It can also exchange data.
logical link control (LLC) According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loopback message (LBM) The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
loopback reply (LBR) A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending time of LBR.
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
low-pass filter (LPF) A filter designed to transmit electromagnetic frequencies below a certain value, while excluding those of a higher frequency.
lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet that contains several subracks.
lower threshold A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will trigger a threshold-crossing event.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAC address A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long.
MAC address aging A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received from this device within a specified time period.
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
MAN See metropolitan area network.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF message communication function
MCR minimum cell rate
MD See maintenance domain.
MDP message dispatch process
ME See maintenance entity.
MEG maintenance entity group
MEL maintenance entity group level
MEP See maintenance entity group end point.
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIP See maintenance entity group intermediate point.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MP maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MPLS VPN See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network.
MPLS-TP See transport profile for multiprotocol label switching.
MS multiplex section
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSB most significant bit
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MST See multiplex section termination.
MST region See Multiple Spanning Tree region.
MSTI See multiple spanning tree instance.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTIE maximum time interval error
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.
MUX See multiplexer.
Media Access Control (MAC)
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multicast Routing Protocol
A protocol used to set up and maintain multicast routes, and to correctly and effectively forward multicast packets. The multicast route is used to set up a loop-free transmission path from the source to multiple receivers, that is, the multicast distribution tree.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiple Spanning Tree region (MST region)
A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region.
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing.
main topology A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall network running status.
maintenance domain (MD)
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity (ME) An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
maintenance entity group end point (MEP)
An end point of a MEG, which is able to initialize and stop the transmission of OAM data packets for fault management and performance monitoring.
maintenance entity group intermediate point (MIP)
An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform any operations on network connections.
management information The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
maximum transmission unit (MTU)
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, depending on the network—576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved.
mean time between failures (MTBF)
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair (MTTR)
The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
measurement period The interval for NEs to report measurement results to the Network Management System (NMS).
medium A physical medium for storing computer information. A medium is used for data duplication and keeping the data for some time. Original data can be obtained from a medium.
member A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical member of the time dimension.
metropolitan area network (MAN)
A network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
microwave The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared radiation, typically above about 1 mm.
mirroring The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several computers with identical data.
monitor link A port association solution developed as a supplementary to smart link.
monitoring A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent, an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the service agent to provide better service.
mounting An auxiliary or associated condition or component of a device.
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components.
multicast A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host.
multicast listener discovery (MLD)
A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment signal (MFAS)
A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree instance (MSTI)
A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
multiplex section protection (MSP)
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.
multiplex section termination (MST)
A function, which is performed to generate the MSOH during the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.
multiplexing A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section.
multiprotocol label switching virtual private network (MPLS VPN)
An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel.
NAS network access server
NC See NTP client.
NE ID An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID.
NGN See next generation network.
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NLP normal link pulse
NM network management
NMC network management center
NNI network-to-network interface
NP See network processor.
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NRZ code non-return-to-zero code
NRZI non-return to zero inverted
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTP client (NC) A bottom-level device in the time synchronization network. An NTP client obtains time from its upper-level NTP server without providing the time synchronization service. Compared with the top-level NTP server, the middle-level NTP server sometimes is called an NTP client.
network layer Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network parameter control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are commonly used in many different types of equipment and products.
network segment A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service.
network service access point (NSAP)
A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can access OSI network services.
network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network connection or configuration problems.
next generation network (NGN)
A packet-based network aimed to address requirement of various services. It adopts an integrated and open network framework. In NGN, services are separated from call control; call control is separated from bearer. In this way, services are independent of network. NGN can provide various services, such as voice services, data services, multimedia services or the integration of several services.
noise figure A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be specified.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element.
non-gateway network element (non-GNE)
A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the gateway NE application layer.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
OAU See optical amplifier unit.
OC ordinary clock
OCP optical channel protection
OCS optical core switching
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit.
OFS out-of-frame second
OHA overhead access
OHP overhead processing
OLT optical line terminal
ONU See optical network unit.
OPEX operating expense
OPU optical channel payload unit
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI See open systems interconnection.
OSN optical switch node
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.
OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit-k
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed with the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area.
offline Pertaining to the disconnection between a device or a service unit and the system or the network, or no running of a device and service unit.
online A state indicating that a computer device or program is activated and is ready for operations, and can communicate with a computer or can be controlled by the computer.
open systems interconnection (OSI)
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
through 1 deal with network functions.
operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, support activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state, and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier unit (OAU)
A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction.
optical attenuator A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
optical connector A component normally attached to an optical cable or a piece of apparatus to provide frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables.
optical fiber A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection.
optical interface A component that connects several transmit or receive units.
optical network unit (ONU)
A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)
The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. OSNR = signal power/noise power.
optical splitter A passive component, which is used for splitting and sending optical power to multiple ONUs connected by an optical fiber. In a GPON system that consists of the OLT, ONU, splitter, and optical fibers, according to the split ratio, the optical signal over the optical fiber connected to the OLT is splitted into multiple channels of optical signals and send each channel to each ONU. Split ratio determines how many channels of optical signals an optical fiber can be split to.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)
A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain channel.
optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR)
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transponder unit (OTU)
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
outdoor unit (ODU) The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PA power amplifier
PADR PPPoE active discovery request
PBS See peak burst size.
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCM See pulse code modulation.
PCR See peak cell rate.
PCS physical coding sublayer
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PGND cable A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PKT partition knowledge table
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
POH path overhead
POS See packet over SDH/SONET.
PPD partial packet discard
PPI PDH physical interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PPS port protection switching
PQ See priority queuing.
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
PSD See power spectrum density.
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PSU power supply unit
PT payload type
PTI payload type indicator
PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PVC permanent virtual channel
PVID See port default VLAN ID.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet discarding A function of discarding the packets from unknown VLAN domain or broadcast packets. Packet Discarding is used to prevent the situation where unknown packets or broadcast packets use the bandwidth on a link, improving the reliability of service transmission.
packet forwarding An action performed by a router to forward a received datagram, where the destination IP address does not match the IP address of the router, to another router or destination host on the router list.
packet loss The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot accept any incoming data at a given moment.
packet over SDH/SONET (POS)
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet rate The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or bytes/s.
packet switched network (PSN)
A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
packet switching A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections.
paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane.
parity bit A check bit appended to an array of binary digits to make the sum of all the binary digits, including the check bit, always odd or always even.
parity check A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted.
parts replacement A maintenance operation of removing a faulty part or a part to be examined from a running device and then installing a new part.
passive mode A working mode of EFM OAM. An interface in the passive mode cannot initiate the discovery and remote loopback.
patch An independent software unit used for fixing the bugs in software.
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that is used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that PBS should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. See also CIR, CBS, and PIR.
peak cell rate (PCR) The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells.
peer BGP speakers that exchange information with each other.
per-hop behavior (PHB) IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
performance alarm An alarm generated when the actual result of a measurement entity equals the predefined logical expression for threshold or exceeds the predefined threshold.
performance parameters The performance parameters identify some indexes to scale the general performance of the system. The indexes include the number of managed nodes, number of supported clients and log database capacity. The parameters are sorted into static parameters, dynamic parameters and networking bandwidth parameters.
performance register The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historical performance register, 24-hour historical performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system generates a performance alarm.
permanent virtual path (PVP)
Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
phase The relative position in time within a single period of a signal.
phase-locked loop (PLL) A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-frequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
physical layer Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking.
physical link The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted.
ping A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages.
ping test A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the data packet of the same size returned from the target host.
plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
point-to-point service (P2P)
A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are terminal users.
pointer An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
policy A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met.
policy template A template that is used to define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example, rating, debiting and accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be instantiated. They can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation method, and action functions are carried out.
polling A mechanism for the NMS to query the agent status and other data on a regular basis.
port default VLAN ID (PVID)
A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries no VLAN tag when reaching the port.
port priority The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially.
power adjustment A method for dynamically and properly assigning power according to the real-time status of a wireless network. When an AP runs under an AC for the first time, the AP uses its maximum transmit power. When getting reports from its neighbors (that is, other APs that are detected by the AP and managed by the same AC), the AP determines to increase or decrease its power according to the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
report conclusion.
power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power control A process in which the MS or BS uses certain rules to adjust and control the transmit power according to the change in the channel condition and the power of the received signal.
power distribution unit (PDU)
A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
power module A module that provides power supply to other boards or modules.
power off An operation that switches off devices during upgrade or expansion.
power on To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power
power spectrum density (PSD)
The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain.
printed circuit board (PCB)
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate.
priority queuing (PQ) A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed earlier than others.
private line A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements.
protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS)
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation.
public switched telephone network (PSTN)
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
pulse A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
pulse code modulation (PCM)
A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses. Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code modulation is more immune to noise than PAM.
Q
QA Q adaptation
QAM See quadrature amplitude modulation.
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying.
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs.
QoS See quality of service.
quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM)
Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals, or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves, using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are out of phase with each other by 90° and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature components — hence the name of the scheme.
quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK)
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service.
RAI remote alarm indication
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
REI remote error indication
RF See radio frequency.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RNC See radio network controller.
ROPA See remote optical pumping amplifier.
RP rendezvous point
RPR resilient packet ring
RS232 A asynchronous transfer mode that does not involve hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RS422 The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232.
RSL See received signal level.
RSOH regenerator section overhead
RSSI See received signal strength indicator.
RST regenerator section termination
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RTN radio transmission node
RTP See Real-Time Transport Protocol.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.
Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
A type of host-to-host protocol used in real-time multimedia services such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and video.
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS)
A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability.
RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio frequency (RF) A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current.
radio network controller (RNC)
A piece of equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources.
radio propagation model An empirical mathematical formulation for the characterization of radio wave propagation as a function of frequency, distance and other conditions. A single model is usually developed to predict the behavior of propagation for all similar links under similar constraints.
random early detection (RED)
A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
rate limiting A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a physical interface or a Tunnel interface. Rate limiting is directly enabled on the interface to control the traffic passing the interface.
real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR)
A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR), sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time.
reboot To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards.
received signal level (RSL) The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
received signal strength indicator (RSSI)
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
receiver sensitivity The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
recognition Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.
reference clock A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference.
reflectance The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
relay An electronic control device that has a control system and a system to be controlled. The relay of the telepresence system is used to control the power of telepresence equipment and is controlled by the telepresence host.
remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA)
A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission.
reservation An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount, free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
resistance The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators.
resource sharing A physical resource belonging to two or more protection subnetworks.
response A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the request packet.
robustness The ability of a system to maintain function even with changes in internal structure or external environment.
rollback A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation.
root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
router A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet.
routing The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from source to destination.
routing protocol A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be forwarded.
rt-VBR See real-time variable bit rate.
S
S1 byte A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network, each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
SAN storage area network
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
SCR sustainable cell rate
SD See signal degrade.
SD trigger flag A signal degrade trigger flag that determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDP serious disturbance period
SDRAM See synchronous dynamic random access memory.
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SEMF synchronous equipment management function
SES severely errored second
SETS SDH equipment timing source
SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SHDSL See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line.
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCMP subnetwork connection multipath protection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNR See signal-to-noise ratio.
SOH section overhead
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPE See superstratum provider edge.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte
SSU synchronization supply unit
STD system target decoder
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVC switched virtual connection
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status Message (SSM)
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes.
security Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals.
security service A service, provided by a layer of communicating open systems, which ensures adequate security of the systems or of data transfer.
self-healing A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time.
serial port An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers.
service flow An MAC-layer-based unidirectional transmission service. It is used to transmit data packets, and is characterized by a set of QoS parameters, such as latency, jitter, and throughput.
service level The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by an evaluating party.
service protection A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end.
session A logical connection between two nodes on a network for the exchange of data. It generally can apply to any link between any two data devices. A session is also used simply to describe the connection time.
shaping A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific defined traffic profile.
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
signaling The information exchange concerning the establishment and control of a telecommunication circuit and the management of the network.
single-ended switching A protection operation method that takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (for example, trail, subnetwork connection), in the case of a unidirectional failure.
single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL)
A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide the broadband access service.
single-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified polarization.
slicing Dividing data into the information units proper for transmission.
smooth upgrade Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type.
standard definition-serial digital interface signal (SD-SDI)
Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
static ARP A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP addresses must be forwarded through this gateway.
static route A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must be changed by the operators.
statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques.
steering A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH transoceanic multiplex section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the source and sink nodes of a service.
stress The force, or combination of forces, which produces a strain; force exerted in any direction or manner between contiguous bodies, or parts of bodies, and taking specific names according to its direction, or mode of action, as thrust or pressure, pull or tension, shear or tangential stress.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
subnet A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router matches with the IP address.
superstratum provider edge (SPE)
Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE devices that are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE.
suppress To forbid the printing of the paper bill of an account that meets certain conditions during the bill run.
suspension A specific state in the life cycle of a subscriber. A subscriber in this state can neither make calls nor receive calls.
switching capacity The backplane bandwidth or switching bandwidth. The switching capacity is the maximum data that can be processed by the interface processor of a switch and the data bus. The backplane bandwidth indicates the overall data switching capability of a switch, in Gbit/s.
switching priority A priority of a board that is defined for protection switching. When several protected boards need to be switched, a switching priority should be set for each board. If the switching priorities of the boards are the same, services on the board that fails later cannot be switched. Services on the board with higher priority can preempt the switching resources of that with lower priority.
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM)
A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than conventional memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus and is capable of running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional FPM RAM, and about twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM is replacing EDO DRAM in computers.
synchronous optical network (SONET)
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCA See threshold crossing alarm.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
TCI tag control information
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCN topology change notification
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC tunable dispersion compensator
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TE terminal equipment
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trace identifier mismatch
TLV See type-length-value.
TM See terminal multiplexer.
TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TPID tag protocol identifier
TPS See tributary protection switching.
TPS protection The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board. After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board.
TSD trail signal degrade
TTI trail trace identifier
TTL See time to live.
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TU tributary unit
TU-LOP tributary unit loss of pointer
TUG tributary unit group
Tc committed rate measurement interval
Telnet A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854.
ToS type of service
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.
tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
tangent ring A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between them. The common node often leads to single-point failures.
telecommunications management network (TMN)
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.
terminal multiplexer (TM) A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals.
threshold An amount, limit or level on a scale. Changes will occur with a threshold reached.
threshold alarm The alarm occurs when the monitored value exceeds the threshold.
threshold crossing alarm (TCA)
An alarm generated when a threshold is crossed.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection, service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth.
throughput capability The data input/output capability of the data transmission interface.
time division multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3…), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel.
time to live (TTL) A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL value when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
timer Symbolic representation for a timer object (for example, a timer object may have a primitive designated as T-Start Request). Various MAC entities utilize timer entities that provide triggers for certain MAC state transitions.
timestamp The current time of an event that is recorded by a computer. By using mechanisms such as the Network Time Protocol (NTP), a computer maintains accurate current time, calibrated to minute fractions of a second.
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
limited, and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input.
topology The configuration or layout of a network formed by the connections between devices on a local area network (LAN) or between two or more LANs.
topology discovery A technique to accurately determine the exact layout of a network using a few assumptions about the network architecture and simple tools.
trTCM See two rate three color marker.
traceroute A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of datagrams with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time exceeded messages that return to determine routers along the path.
traffic The product of the number of calls made and received and the average duration of each call in a measurement period.
traffic classification A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently.
traffic policy A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions.
traffic shaping A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
traffic statistics An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor and maintain the networks, and plan the networks.
trail management function A network level management function of the network management system. This function enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report.
trail termination source identifier (TTSI)
A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.
transaction A business between a carrier and customer, such as payment and account adjustment.
transfer A process of transferring the account balance of an account to another account.
transit A packet is transmitted along an LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the packet is labeled. The intermediate nodes are named transits.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
transit node All the nodes except the master node on an RRPP ring.
transmission delay The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the equipment forwarding latency.
transmit power control A technical mechanism used within some networking devices in order to prevent too much unwanted interference between different wireless networks.
transparent transmission A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase.
transport profile for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS-TP)
MPLS-TP is an extension to MPLS in terms of forwarding, OAM, reliability, NMS and control plane protocol standardized by IETF to provide sufficient transport functionality.
tray A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
tributary loopback A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and inloop.
tributary protection switching (TPS)
A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary processing boards.
trunk Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as speech, data and video signals.
trunk link A link used to transport VLAN communication between two switches.
trunk port A switch port used to connect to other switches. The trunk port can connect to only the trunk link. Only VLANs allowed to pass through a trunk port can be configured on the trunk port.
tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel.
tunnel ID A group of information, including the token, slot number of an outgoing interface, tunnel type, and location method.
twisted pair cable A type of cable that consists of two independently insulated wires twisted around one another for the purposes of canceling out electromagnetic interference which can cause crosstalk. The number of twists per meter makes up part of the specifications for a given type of cable. The greater the number of twists is, the more crosstalk is reduced.
two rate three color marker (trTCM)
An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR.
type-length-value (TLV) An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called Code-Length-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can be added to support new features,
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
which is flexible in describing information loaded in packets.
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAS unavailable second
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPI user payload identifier
UPM uninterruptible power module
UPS uninterruptible power supply
UTC See Coordinated Universal Time.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagram. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. There is a possibility that UDP messages will be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The destination device does not confirm whether a data packet is received.
unavailable time event (UAT)
An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds.
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unknown multicast packet A packet for which no forwarding entry is found in the multicast forwarding table.
uplink A transmission channel through which radio signals or other signals are transmitted to the central office.
uplink tunnel GTP Tunnel from the Mobile Node to the SGSN.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side.
upper limit The maximum consumption amount that a carrier sets for a subscriber in a bill cycle. If the consumption amount if a subscriber exceeds the maximum consumption amount that the carrier sets, the OCS still deducts the maximum consumption amount that the carrier sets.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
upstream In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link.
upstream board A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board, services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device.
usage parameter control (UPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
user-to-network interface (UNI)
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
V.24 The physical layer interface specification between DTE and DCE defined by the ITU-T. It complies with EIA/TIA-232.
VAS See value-added service.
VB virtual bridge
VBR See variable bit rate.
VC trunk See virtual container trunk.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCG See virtual concatenation group.
VCI virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board.
VIP very important person
VLAN virtual local area network
VLAN mapping A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the destination.
VLAN mapping table One of the properties of the MST region, which describes mappings between VLANs and spanning tree instances.
VLAN stacking A technology that adds a VLAN tag to each incoming packet. The VLAN stacking technology implements transparent transmission of C-VLANs in the ISP network to realize the application of Layer 2 Virtual Private Network
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
(VPN).
VP See virtual path.
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI virtual switch interface
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network.
VoIP See voice over IP.
value-added service (VAS) A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies, computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added services.
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
virtual channel connection (VCC)
A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end points.
virtual circuit A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) .
virtual concatenation group (VCG)
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link
virtual container trunk (VC trunk)
The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs.
virtual fiber The fiber that is created between different devices. A virtual fiber represents the optical path that bears SDH services in a WDM system.
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier (VPI)
The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN service (VPLS)
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.
voice over IP (VoIP) An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN).
voltage drop The voltage developed across a component or conductor by the flow of current through the resistance or impedance of that component or conductor.
W
WAN See wide area network.
WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRED See weighted random early detection.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE management layer of the transport network.
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA)
A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
wavelength The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a traveling wave, that is, the distance over which a wave is transmitted within a vibration period.
wavelength protection group
Data for describing the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet for SDH NEs. The wavelength path protection can work only with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group.
weighted fair queuing (WFQ)
A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early detection (WRED)
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
wide area network (WAN) A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country.
wireless local area A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Product Description A Glossary
network (WLAN) data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the
traditional LAN.
working path A path allocated to transport the normal traffic.
working service A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
wrapping A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packet-based T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the node that detects a failure. For details, see ITU-T G.841.
X
X.21 ITU-T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines. It is mainly used in Europe and Japan.
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network (PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
Y
Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI), Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
Top Related